Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/301
Nächste Seite
Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 12
Warning lights and chimes 12
Gauges 17
Message center 19
Entertainment Systems 25
AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3 25
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) 33
USB port 35
Satellite radio information 38
SYNC 41
Climate Controls 42
Manual heating and air conditioning 42
Rear window defroster 45
Lights 46
Headlamps 46
Turn signal control 49
Bulb replacement 50
Driver Controls 56
Windshield wiper/washer control 56
Steering wheel adjustment 57
Power windows 60
Mirrors 61
Speed control 62
Moon roof 65
Locks and Security 68
Keys 68
Locks 73
Anti-theft system 83
Table of Contents
1
2011 Focus (foc)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Inhalt der Seiten


  • Page 1

    Table of Contents
    Introduction
    Instrument Cluster

    4
    12

    Warning lights and chimes
    Gauges
    Message center

    12
    17
    19

    Entertainment Systems

    25

    AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3
    Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
    USB port
    Satellite radio information
    SYNC௡

    Climate Controls
    Manual heating and air conditioning
    Rear window defroster

    Lights
    Headlamps
    Turn signal control
    Bulb replacement

    Driver Controls
    Windshield wiper/washer control
    Steering wheel adjustment
    Power windows
    Mirrors
    Speed control
    Moon roof

    25
    33
    35
    38
    41

    42
    42
    45

    46
    46
    49
    50

    56
    56
    57
    60
    61
    62
    65

    Locks and Security

    68

    Keys
    Locks
    Anti-theft system

    68
    73
    83

    1

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 2

    Table of Contents
    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Seating
    Safety restraints
    Airbags
    Child restraints

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Tire information
    Tire inflation
    Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
    Vehicle loading
    Trailer towing
    Recreational towing

    Driving

    88
    88
    95
    110
    125

    144
    144
    146
    159
    163
    169
    169

    171

    Starting
    Brakes
    AdvanceTrac௡
    Transmission operation

    171
    176
    178
    184

    Roadside Emergencies

    190

    Getting roadside assistance
    Hazard flasher control
    Fuel pump shut-off switch
    Fuses and relays
    Changing tires
    Wheel lug nut torque
    Jump starting
    Wrecker towing

    Customer Assistance
    Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
    Reporting safety defects (Canada only)

    Cleaning

    2

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)

    190
    191
    192
    192
    199
    205
    206
    209

    211
    218
    218

    219



  • Page 3

    Table of Contents
    Maintenance and Specifications
    Engine compartment
    Engine oil
    Battery
    Engine coolant
    Fuel information
    Air filter(s)
    Part numbers
    Maintenance product specifications and capacities
    Engine data

    227
    229
    231
    233
    235
    241
    255
    258
    259
    262

    Accessories

    266

    Ford Extended Service Plan

    269

    Scheduled Maintenance Guide

    273

    Normal scheduled maintenance and log

    Index

    279

    296

    All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
    including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
    system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
    authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
    notice and without incurring obligation.
    Copyright © 2010 Ford Motor Company

    3

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 4

    Introduction
    CONGRATULATIONS
    Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
    well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
    you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
    pleasure you will derive from driving it.
    For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
    following website:
    • In the United States: www.ford.com
    • In Canada: www.ford.ca
    • In Australia: www.ford.com.au
    • In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
    Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
    This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
    and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
    particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
    options before they are generally available.
    Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
    an integral part of the vehicle.
    WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an
    accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel
    supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden
    vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the
    Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
    SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
    Warning symbols in this guide
    How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
    this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
    highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
    read and observed.

    4

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 5

    Introduction
    Warning symbols on your vehicle
    When you see this symbol, it is
    imperative that you consult the
    relevant section of this guide before
    touching or attempting adjustment
    of any kind.
    Protecting the environment
    We must all play our part in
    protecting the environment. Correct
    vehicle usage and the authorized
    disposal of waste, cleaning and
    lubrication materials are significant
    steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
    guide with the tree symbol.
    CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
    WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
    certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
    the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
    reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
    certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
    to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
    reproductive harm.
    PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
    Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
    pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
    – Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
    See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
    BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
    Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
    continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
    new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
    moving parts a chance to break in.
    Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
    these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
    Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
    usage.
    5

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 6

    Introduction
    SPECIAL NOTICES
    New Vehicle Limited Warranty
    For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
    your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
    Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
    Special instructions
    For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
    controls.
    WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
    chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
    result in personal injury.
    WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
    should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
    IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR P215/45R17 LOW-PROFILE TIRES
    AND WHEELS
    If your vehicle is equipped with P215/45R17 tires, they are low-profile
    tires. These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport
    appearance. With low-profile tires, you may notice an increase in road
    noise and faster tire wear, depending on road conditions and driving
    styles. Due to their design, low-profile tires and wheels are more prone
    to road damage from potholes, rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails
    and curb contact than standard tires and wheels. Your vehicle’s warranty
    does not cover these types of damage. Tires should always be kept at the
    correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be taken when
    operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and
    tire damage.
    DATA RECORDING
    Service Data Recording
    Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
    storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
    includes information about the performance or status of various systems
    and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
    6

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 7

    Introduction
    systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
    Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
    access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
    through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
    your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC௡
    Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
    may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
    authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
    used for any purpose. See your SYNC௡ supplement for more information.
    Event Data Recording
    This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
    main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
    crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
    road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
    vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
    related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
    of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
    designed to record such data as:
    • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
    • Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
    buckled/fastened;
    • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
    and/or the brake pedal; and
    • How fast the vehicle was travelling; and
    • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
    This data can help provide a better understanding of the
    circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
    Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
    crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
    normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
    (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
    limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
    Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
    enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
    personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
    investigation.

    7

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 8

    Introduction
    To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
    and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
    vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
    that have such special equipment, can read the information if
    they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
    and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
    information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
    order or where required by law enforcement, other government
    authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
    Other parties may seek to access the information independently
    of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
    Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
    Data Recorders applies to SYNC௡ or its features, please note the
    following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
    Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
    to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
    involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
    activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
    to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
    or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
    latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
    crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
    operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
    you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
    911 Assist feature. See your SYNC௡ supplement for more
    information.
    Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
    Information (if equipped, U.S. only) the service uses GPS
    technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
    current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
    information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
    reports, or business searches your request. If you do not want
    Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
    the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
    provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
    information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
    Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC௡ supplement
    for more information.

    8

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 9

    Introduction
    CELL PHONE USE
    The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
    important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
    drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
    such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
    and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
    situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
    equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
    Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
    phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
    portable two-way radios.
    WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
    control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
    use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
    your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
    operation of your vehicle.
    We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving
    and that you comply with all applicable laws.
    EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
    SPECIFIC INFORMATION
    For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
    features and options that are different from the features and options that
    are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
    be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
    unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
    recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
    Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
    Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
    for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
    information and warnings.

    9

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 10

    Introduction
    These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
    Vehicle Symbol Glossary
    Safety Alert

    See Owner’s Guide

    Fasten Safety Belt

    Airbag - Front

    Airbag - Side

    Child Seat Lower
    Anchor

    Child Seat Tether
    Anchor

    Brake System

    Anti-Lock Brake System

    Parking Brake System

    Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based

    Parking Aid System

    Stability Control System

    Speed Control

    Master Lighting Switch

    Hazard Warning Flasher

    Fog Lamps-Front

    Fuse Compartment

    Fuel Pump Reset

    Windshield Wash/Wipe

    Windshield
    Defrost/Demist

    Rear Window
    Defrost/Demist

    10

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 11

    Introduction
    Vehicle Symbol Glossary
    Power Windows
    Front/Rear

    Power Window Lockout

    Child Safety Door
    Lock/Unlock

    Interior Luggage
    Compartment Release

    Panic Alarm

    Engine Oil

    Engine Coolant

    Engine Coolant
    Temperature

    Do Not Open When Hot

    Battery

    Avoid Smoking, Flames,
    or Sparks

    Battery Acid

    Explosive Gas

    Fan Warning

    Power Steering Fluid

    Maintain Correct Fluid
    Level

    Service Engine Soon

    Engine Air Filter

    Passenger Compartment
    Air Filter

    Jack

    Check Fuel Cap

    Low Tire Pressure
    Warning

    MAX
    MIN

    11

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 12

    Instrument Cluster
    WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES

    Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
    become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
    illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
    Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
    bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
    respective system warning light for additional information.
    Service engine soon: The service
    engine soon indicator light
    illuminates when the ignition is first
    turned to the on position to check
    the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
    Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon”
    light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
    malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service
    engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
    ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
    (I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
    Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
    diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
    On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
    chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
    damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
    heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
    immediately by your authorized dealer.
    12

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 13

    Instrument Cluster
    WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
    temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
    system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
    causing a fire.

    Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
    the fuel cap may not be properly
    installed. Continued driving with
    this light on may cause the Service
    engine soon warning light to come
    on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the
    Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
    Brake system warning light: To
    !
    P
    confirm the brake system warning
    light is functional, it will
    BRAKE
    momentarily illuminate when the
    ignition is turned to the on position
    when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
    by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
    position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
    time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
    after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the
    brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
    WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
    light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
    performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
    Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
    distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
    the risk of personal injury.

    Anti-lock brake system (if
    equipped): If the ABS light stays
    ABS
    illuminated or continues to flash, a
    malfunction has been detected, have
    the system serviced immediately by
    your authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
    warning light also is illuminated.
    13

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 14

    Instrument Cluster
    Airbag readiness: If this light fails
    to illuminate when the ignition is
    turned to on, continues to flash or
    remains on, have the system
    serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will sound
    when there is a malfunction in the indicator light.
    Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
    your safety belt. A Belt-Minder௡
    chime will also sound to remind you
    to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
    the Seating and Safety Restraints
    chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder௡ chime feature.
    Charging system: Illuminates when
    the battery is not charging properly.
    If it stays on while the engine is
    running, there may be a malfunction
    with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
    possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
    component.
    Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
    when the oil pressure falls below the
    normal range, refer to Engine oil in
    the Maintenance and
    Specifications chapter.
    Engine coolant temperature:
    Illuminates when the engine coolant
    temperature is high. Stop the
    vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
    Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
    WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
    engine is running or hot.
    Anti-theft system: Flashes when
    the SecuriLock௡ Passive Anti-theft
    system has been activated.

    14

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 15

    Instrument Cluster
    Overdrive off (if equipped):
    O/D
    Illuminates when the overdrive
    OFF
    function of the transmission has
    been turned off, refer to the
    Driving chapter. If the light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have
    the transmission serviced soon, or damage may occur.
    Speed control (if equipped):
    Illuminates when the speed control
    is activated. Turns off when the
    speed control system is deactivated.
    Upshift (if equipped): To
    maximize fuel economy, this light
    illuminates when the manual
    transmission should be shifted to
    the next highest gear. Refer to the Driving chapter for more
    information.
    Low tire pressure warning:
    Illuminates when your tire pressure
    is low. If the light remains on at
    start up or while driving, the tire
    pressure should be checked. Refer
    to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
    the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
    seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on or
    begins to flash, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For
    more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring
    system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
    AdvanceTrac௡/traction control:
    Illuminates when the
    AdvanceTrac௡/traction control is
    active. If the light remains on,
    contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to the Driving
    chapter for more information.
    Throttle control/transmission:
    Illuminates when a powertrain fault
    has been detected. Contact your
    authorized dealer as soon as
    possible.
    15

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 16

    Instrument Cluster
    Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
    level in the fuel tank is at or near
    empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
    chapter).
    Door ajar: Illuminates when the
    ignition is on and any door, the
    trunk or hood is open.
    Turn signal: Illuminates when the
    left or right turn signal or the
    hazard lights are turned on. If the
    indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
    High beams: Illuminates when the
    high beam headlamps are turned on.
    Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
    ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
    Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
    lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
    driver’s door is opened.
    Perimeter alarm warning chime: Sounds when using a key to unlock
    the driver’s doors and the perimeter alarm is armed.

    16

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 17

    Instrument Cluster
    GAUGES

    Speedometer: Indicates the
    current vehicle speed.

    Engine coolant temperature
    gauge: Indicates engine coolant
    temperature. At normal operating
    temperature, the needle will be in
    the normal range. If it enters the
    red section, the engine is
    overheating. Stop the vehicle as
    soon as safely possible, switch
    off the engine and let the engine cool. If it enters the red section
    and the service engine soon indicator light illuminates, refer to How
    fail safe cooling works in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
    WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
    engine is running or hot.

    17

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 18

    Instrument Cluster
    Odometer: Registers the total miles
    (kilometers) of the vehicle.
    If equipped with a message center,
    refer to Message center in this
    chapter on how to switch the
    display between Metric and English.
    Trip odometer: Registers the distance of individual journeys.
    • Standard instrument cluster:
    Press the SELECT/RESET button
    once to switch from the odometer to
    the TRIP A or B feature. To reset
    the trip, press and hold the
    SELECT/RESET button.
    • Optional instrument cluster: See TRIP A/B under Message center
    in this chapter.
    Tachometer: Indicates the engine
    speed in revolutions per minute.
    Driving with your tachometer
    pointer continuously at the top of
    the scale may damage the engine.

    Fuel gauge: Indicates
    approximately how much fuel is left
    in the fuel tank (when the ignition
    is in the on position). The fuel
    gauge may vary slightly when the
    vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
    Refer to Filling the tank in the
    Maintenance and Specifications
    chapter for more information.

    18

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 19

    Instrument Cluster
    MESSAGE CENTER
    Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
    systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
    conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator
    chime.
    The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
    Info
    Press the INFO button repeatedly to
    cycle through the following features:

    TRIP A/B
    Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
    button until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the
    trip mode). Press and hold RESET until it resets.
    Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display between Metric
    and English.
    MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
    For more information, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
    chapter.
    MILES (km) TO E
    This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
    the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
    Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
    correctly detect the added fuel.
    LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles
    (80 km), to empty. Press RESET to clear this warning message. It will
    return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles
    (0 km) miles to empty.
    Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy,
    which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km).
    This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The
    running average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if
    the battery is disconnected.
    19

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 20

    Instrument Cluster
    AVG MPG (L/100km)
    Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
    or liters/100 km.
    If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
    by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
    your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
    • Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
    • Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
    service stations
    • Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
    • Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
    1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
    system engaged to display a stabilized average.
    2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
    It is important to press the RESET button (press and hold RESET for
    two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
    control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
    For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
    Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
    MPG (L/km)
    This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
    poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
    Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
    When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
    illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
    System check and vehicle feature customization
    Press the SETUP button repeatedly
    to cycle the message center through
    the following features:

    RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
    When this message appears, press the RESET button and the message
    center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a
    status of the item if needed.
    20

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 21

    Instrument Cluster
    1. CHARGING SYSTEM
    2. DOORS
    3. TRUNK
    4. BRAKE SYSTEM
    5. DTE/FUEL LEVEL
    6. MYKEY DISTANCE (if programmed)
    7. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
    8. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
    Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
    UNITS
    Displays the current units in English or Metric.
    Press RESET to change between English and Metric.
    AUTOLOCK
    This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
    shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
    Press the RESET control to turn autolock on or off.
    AUTOUNLOCK
    This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
    door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
    Press the RESET control to turn autounlock on or off.
    CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY
    For more information refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
    chapter.
    LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
    Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
    Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
    Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
    center through each of the language choices.
    Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to set the language
    choice.

    21

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 22

    Instrument Cluster
    System warnings
    System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
    vehicle’s operating systems.
    In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
    cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
    seconds.
    The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
    more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
    the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
    RESET control and clearing the warning message.
    Warning messages can be divided into three categories:
    • Cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected.
    • Reappears 10 minutes after resetting it.
    • Reappears if the condition clears, then reoccurs within the same
    ignition on/off cycle.
    Pressing RESET can clear some messages. If they do not clear when
    pressing RESET, the condition causing the message must be addressed
    to clear the message.
    Pressing RESET can clear some messages. If they do not clear when
    pressing RESET, the condition causing the message must be addressed
    to clear the message.
    DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver door is not
    completely closed.
    PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger door is
    not completely closed.
    REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
    completely closed.
    REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
    not completely closed.
    TRUNK AJAR — Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.
    PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
    the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
    (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
    contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early
    reminder of a low fuel condition.
    22

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 23

    Instrument Cluster
    CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the braking system is not
    operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
    contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
    and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to
    Brake/clutch fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
    LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
    vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
    Wheels and Loading chapter.
    TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the tire
    pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
    continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
    possible.
    TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
    sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
    information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
    Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
    Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
    contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed at startup when
    MyKey™ is in use. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter
    for more information.
    KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
    to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey™ in
    the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
    VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
    use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle
    speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
    Security chapter for more information.
    SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
    and MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
    MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
    CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
    use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
    speed. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
    information.

    23

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 24

    Instrument Cluster
    VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in use
    and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
    80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
    chapter for more information.
    TOP SPEED MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
    use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph
    (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
    more information.
    BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
    use and Belt-Minder௡ is activated. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
    Security chapter for more information.
    ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
    use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac௡ system and the optional
    setting is on. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
    more information.
    TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE (if equipped)— Displayed when
    the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the
    key on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm
    system from triggering, the ignition must be turned to start or on before
    the 12 second chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks
    and Security chapter.

    24

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 25

    Entertainment Systems
    AUDIO SYSTEMS
    AM/FM/single CD satellite compatible sound system

    WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
    control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
    drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
    take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
    operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
    handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable
    laws.
    Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
    this feature, the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for
    up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front
    door is opened.
    Setting the clock
    To set the time, press CLOCK#. The display will read SET TIME. Use the
    memory preset numbers (0–9) to enter in the desired time–hours and
    minutes and press OK. The clock will then begin from that time.

    25

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 26

    Entertainment Systems
    AM/FM Radio
    / VOL (Power/Volume): Press
    to turn the radio on/off. Turn the
    knob to increase/decrease volume.
    If the volume is set above a certain
    level and the ignition is turned off,
    the volume will come back on at a
    nominal listening level when the
    ignition switch is turned back on.
    AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
    TUNE: Turn the knob to go
    up/down the frequency band in
    individual increments.

    DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then select the desired radio frequency
    (i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).
    SEEK/TRACK: Press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to access the
    previous/next strong radio station.

    SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all strong radio stations.
    MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): When
    tuned to any station, press and hold
    a preset button until sound returns
    and PRESET # SAVED appears in
    the display. You can save up to 30
    stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and FM2.
    Saving presets automatically– Autoset allows you to set the strongest
    local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset
    stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
    To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO
    SEEK/TRACK
    to
    PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
    switch AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search
    to initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press
    26

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 27

    Entertainment Systems
    another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate.
    The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1
    will begin playing.
    If there are fewer than 10 strong stations, the system will store the last
    one in the remaining presets.
    RBDS Radio
    Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
    RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
    CLASSIC, COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
    To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in the
    SEEK/TRACK
    to switch RDS ON/OFF. When RDS is
    display. Use
    OFF, you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or view
    the station name or type.
    CAT/FOLD (Category/Folder): This feature allows you to select from
    various music categories.
    To change RDS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS ON/OFF
    /
    to switch RDS to ON. Press CAT.
    appears in the display. Use
    PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDS CATEGORY will appear in the
    /
    to scroll through all possible categories. When the
    display. Press
    desired category appears in the display, press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to
    find the next station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief
    sampling of all stations playing that category of music.
    CD/MP3 Player
    CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a disc is already loaded into the
    system, CD/MP3 play will begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded,
    NO DISC will appear in the display.
    LOAD: This control is not operational. To load a CD, simply insert the
    disc, label side up, into the CD slot.
    EJECT: Press EJECT to eject the CD.
    /
    Play/Pause: Press to
    play/pause a track when playing a
    CD.

    27

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 28

    Entertainment Systems
    SEEK/TRACK: Press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to access the
    previous/next track.

    CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder):
    In MP3 mode only– Press CAT/FOLD and then press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to access the previous/next folder.
    SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or
    MP3 folder.
    DIRECT:
    In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The display will read DIRECT TRACK
    MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the
    memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that
    track.
    In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons
    (0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific
    folder.
    TEXT:
    In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album (AL), Folder
    (FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
    In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
    displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then
    SEEK/TRACK
    to view the additional display text.
    press
    COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF
    SEEK/TRACK
    to switch between
    appears in the display. Use
    ON/OFF. When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and
    loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
    SHUFFLE: Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON/OFF appears in
    SEEK/TRACK
    to switch between ON/OFF. If
    the display. Use
    you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to begin random play. Otherwise, random play will
    begin when the current track is finished playing. The system will only
    shuffle the currently playing disc.
    28

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 29

    Entertainment Systems
    Satellite Radio (if equipped)
    Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
    subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
    SIRIUS: Press repeatedly to access satellite radio mode, if equipped.
    Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.
    TUNE/OK: Turn the knob to go to
    the next / previous available SIRIUS
    satellite station.

    DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel (i.e. 002) using
    the memory preset buttons (0–9). If you only enter one digit, press OK
    and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,
    the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may
    cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station number is
    entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system
    will continue playing the current station.
    SEEK/TRACK: Press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to seek to the
    previous/next channel. If a specific
    category is selected, (Jazz, Rock,
    News, etc.), press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to seek to the
    previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
    SEEK/TRACK
    to fast seek through the previous/next channels.
    SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite
    channels. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press
    SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels within
    the selected category.
    MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There
    are 30 available presets, 10 each for
    SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save
    satellite channels in your memory
    presets, tune to the desired channel
    then press and hold a memory preset number (0–9) until sound returns.
    TEXT: Press and release to display the artist and song title. While in
    TEXT MODE, press again to scroll through the Artist (AR), Song (SO),
    Channel (CH) and Category (CA).
    29

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 30

    Entertainment Systems
    In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
    displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then
    press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to view the additional display text.
    CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder): Press to switch between turning
    the most recently selected satellite radio category on or off. The category
    icon (CAT) will illuminate in the display when a specific category is
    selected (the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no
    category has ever been selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.
    Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.
    Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a
    satellite radio category.
    SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press MENU when satellite radio mode is
    active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu.
    Press
    /
    to cycle through the following options:
    • CATEGORY MENU- Press OK to enter category mode.
    /
    to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel
    Press
    Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired
    category appears in the display. After a category is selected,
    /
    to search for that specific category of channels only
    press
    (i.e. ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available
    SIRIUS categories and channels. Press OK to close and return to the
    main menu.
    • SONG SEEK MENU- Press OK to enter song seek menu.
    /
    to scroll through the following options:
    Press
    a. SAVE THIS SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s
    title in the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than
    a song, CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song
    is playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
    an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
    the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
    can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
    titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
    /
    to cycle through the saved titles. When
    saved titles and press
    the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
    press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
    b. DELETE A SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
    /
    to cycle through the saved songs. When the
    memory. Press
    song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
    30

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 31

    Entertainment Systems
    The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
    and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
    /
    to select either
    delete the currently listed song, press
    RETURN or CANCEL.
    Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
    SONGS.
    c. DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
    system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
    confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
    DELETED.
    Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
    SONGS.
    d. DISABLE ALERTS/ENABLE ALERTS: Press OK to
    enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your
    selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system
    default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear
    in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For
    example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu
    listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other
    option is to turn them off.
    • CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU- Press OK to enter the Channel
    /
    to scroll through the following
    Lockout menu. Press the
    options:
    a. LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL: Press OK when
    LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read
    ENTER PIN. Enter your four-digit PIN number (initial PIN is 1234)
    and the system will lock/unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED
    or UNLOCKED will be displayed.
    Note: you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to
    lock/unlock when using this feature.
    b. CHANGE PIN: Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed. The
    display will read ENTER OLD PIN. Enter your current (old) PIN
    number and when the system accepts your entry it will display
    ENTER NEW PIN. Enter your new four-digit PIN and the system will
    save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display.
    c. UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS: Press OK when UNLOCK ALL
    CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN. Enter
    your four-digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the
    display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED.
    d. RESET PIN: Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed. The display
    will read ARE YOUR SURE. Press OK again to automatically reset the
    31

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 32

    Entertainment Systems
    PIN number to its initial password setting (1234). PIN RESET TO
    DEFAULT PIN will be displayed.
    e. RETURN: Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system
    will exit back to the satellite radio menu.
    Sound Adjustments
    Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features:
    BASS: Press
    TREBLE: Press

    SEEK/TRACK

    to adjust the level of bass.

    SEEK/TRACK

    SEEK/TRACK
    BALANCE: Press
    the left (L) and right (R) speakers.

    to adjust the level of treble.
    to adjust the audio between

    SEEK/TRACK
    to adjust the audio between the
    FADE: Press
    back (B) and front (F) speakers.
    SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME: With this feature on, radio volume
    automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate
    for road and wind noise.
    The default setting is off.
    SEEK/TRACK
    to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels
    Use
    1–7: Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting)
    allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle
    speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
    Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
    is the maximum setting.
    ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode, if equipped): Press SOUND
    repeatedly to reach the Occupancy mode setting. Press
    SEEK/TRACK
    to select and optimize sound for ALL SEATS,
    DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
    Extra Features
    AUX: Press to access LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode), and SYNC௡ (if
    equipped) modes.
    For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
    Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
    If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC௡, refer to the SYNC௡ information
    included with your vehicle for further information.
    32

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 33

    Entertainment Systems
    OK: Your vehicle may be equipped
    with special phone and media
    features which will require you to
    confirm commands by pressing OK.
    Refer to the SYNC௡ information
    included with your vehicle for
    further information.
    (Phone): If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC௡, press to access
    SYNC PHONE features. Refer to the SYNC௡ information included with
    your vehicle for further information.
    If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC௡, the display will read NO
    PHONE.
    Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
    WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
    control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
    drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
    take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
    operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
    handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable
    laws.

    The auxiliary input jack provides a
    way to connect your portable music
    player to the in-vehicle audio
    system. This allows the audio from a
    portable music player to be played
    through the vehicle speakers with
    high fidelity. To achieve optimal
    performance, please observe the
    following instructions when
    attaching your portable music
    device to the audio system.
    If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to Auxiliary
    input jack section in the Audio Features chapter of your Navigation
    System supplement.
    Required equipment:
    1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
    2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
    connectors at each end
    33

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 34

    Entertainment Systems
    To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
    1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
    2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
    charged and that the device is turned off.
    3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
    of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
    in your vehicle.
    4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
    the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
    5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
    volume.
    6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
    SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
    You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
    be low.
    7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
    level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
    AUX and FM or CD controls.
    Troubleshooting:
    1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
    outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
    compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
    that have a headphone output with a volume control.
    2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
    necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
    system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
    portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
    should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
    volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
    3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
    portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
    recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
    4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
    when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
    (play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
    5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
    portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
    moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
    34

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 35

    Entertainment Systems
    location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
    in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
    portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
    USB port (if equipped)
    WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
    control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
    drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
    take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
    operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
    handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable
    laws.
    Your vehicle may be equipped with a
    USB port inside your center console.
    This feature allows you to plug in
    media playing devices, memory
    sticks, and also to charge devices if
    they support this feature. For
    further information on this feature,
    refer to Accessing and using your
    USB port in the SYNC௡ supplement
    or Navigation System supplement.
    GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
    Radio frequencies:
    AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
    Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
    Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
    AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
    FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
    Radio reception factors:
    There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
    • Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
    weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
    • Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
    traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
    • Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
    may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
    is displayed.
    35

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 36

    Entertainment Systems
    CD/CD player care
    Do:
    • Handle discs by their edges only.
    (Never touch the playing
    surface).
    • Inspect discs before playing.
    • Clean only with an approved CD
    cleaner.
    • Wipe discs from the center out.

    Don’t:
    • Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
    of time.
    • Clean using a circular motion.
    CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
    (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
    incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
    discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
    Do not use any irregular shaped
    CDs or discs with a scratch
    protection film attached.

    36

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 37

    Entertainment Systems
    CDs with homemade paper
    (adhesive) labels should not be
    inserted into the CD player as
    the label may peel and cause the
    CD to become jammed. It is
    recommended that homemade
    CDs be identified with
    permanent felt tip marker rather
    than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
    contact your authorized dealer for further information.
    Audio system warranty and service
    Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
    service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
    MP3 track and folder structure
    Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
    as follows:
    • There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
    (system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
    and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
    section.
    • MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
    player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
    extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
    Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
    depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio
    present.
    • MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
    of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
    by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
    F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
    • Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
    through the disc files.

    37

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 38

    Entertainment Systems
    Sample MP3 structure
    If you are burning your own MP3
    discs, it is important to understand
    how the system will read the
    structures you create. While various
    files may be present, (files with
    extensions other than mp3), only
    files with the .mp3 extension will be
    played. Other files will be ignored
    by the system. This enables you to
    use the same MP3 disc for a variety
    of tasks on your work computer,
    home computer and your in-vehicle
    system.

    1

    .mp3 1
    .mp3 2
    2
    3

    .mp3 3
    .mp3 4
    .mp3 5

    4

    .mp3 6
    .mp3 7

    .doc
    .ppt
    .xls

    In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
    only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
    specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
    in the current folder.
    Satellite radio information (if equipped)
    Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS௡ broadcasts a variety of music, news,
    sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
    more information and a complete list of SIRIUS௡ satellite radio channels,
    visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
    Canada, or call SIRIUS௡ at 1–888–539–7474.

    38

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 39

    Entertainment Systems
    Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
    vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
    roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
    unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
    system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
    radio reception performance:
    • Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
    antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
    material as far away from the antenna as possible.
    • Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
    overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
    interfere with your reception.
    • Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
    tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
    audio mute.
    Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
    a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
    SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
    SIRIUS௡ satellite radio service: SIRIUS௡ satellite radio is a
    subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,
    news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order
    to receive SIRIUS௡ service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
    installed SIRIUS௡ satellite radio system include hardware and a limited
    subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the
    vehicle.
    For information on extended subscription terms, the online media player
    and other SIRIUS௡ features, please contact SIRIUS௡ at 1–888–539–7474.
    Note: SIRIUS௡ reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
    or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
    channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
    Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
    changes.

    39

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 40

    Entertainment Systems
    Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): This 12–digit
    Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
    satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
    with SIRIUS௡. While in satellite radio mode, you can view this number on
    the radio display by pressing the AUX and preset 1 controls
    simultaneously.
    Radio Display
    ACQUIRING

    SAT FAULT

    Condition
    Radio requires more
    than two seconds to
    produce audio for the
    selected channel.
    Internal module or
    system failure present.

    Action Required
    No action required. This
    message should disappear
    shortly.

    If this message does not
    clear within a short period
    of time, or with an ignition
    key cycle, your receiver may
    have a fault. See your
    authorized dealer for
    service.
    INVALID CHNL
    Channel no longer
    This previously available
    available.
    channel is no longer
    available. Tune to another
    channel. If the channel was
    one of your presets, you
    may choose another channel
    for that preset button.
    UNSUBSCRIBED
    Subscription not
    Contact SIRIUS௡ at
    available for this
    1–888–539–7474 to
    channel.
    subscribe to the channel or
    tune to another channel.
    NO TEXT
    Artist information not
    Artist information not
    available.
    available at this time on this
    channel. The system is
    working properly.

    40

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 41

    Entertainment Systems
    Radio Display
    NO TEXT

    Condition
    Song title information
    not available.

    NO TEXT

    Category information
    not available.

    NO SIGNAL

    Loss of signal from
    the SIRIUS௡ satellite
    or SIRIUS௡ tower to
    the vehicle antenna.

    UPDATING

    Update of channel
    programming in
    progress.
    Satellite service has
    been deactivated by
    SIRIUS௡ satellite
    radio.

    CALL SIRIUS௡
    1–888–539–7474

    Action Required
    Song title information not
    available at this time on this
    channel. The system is
    working properly.
    Category information not
    available at this time on this
    channel. The system is
    working properly.
    You are in a location that is
    blocking the SIRIUS௡ signal
    (i.e., tunnel, under an
    overpass, dense foliage, etc).
    The system is working
    properly. When you move
    into an open area, the signal
    should return.
    No action required. The
    process may take up to
    three minutes.
    Call SIRIUS௡ at
    1–888–539–7474 to
    re-activate or resolve
    subscription issues.

    SYNCா (IF EQUIPPED)
    Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC௡, a hands-free communications
    and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
    more information, please refer to the SYNC௡ supplement.

    41

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 42

    Climate Controls
    MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

    Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in
    1.
    the vehicle.
    2. R Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
    defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
    information.
    Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
    3.
    vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and
    thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
    window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
    selection.
    : Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
    4.
    vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will automatically
    provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
    Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
    5.
    When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
    vehicle.
    6.

    : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.

    42

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 43

    Climate Controls
    7.
    : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
    rear seat floor vents and demister vents.
    : Distributes air through the floor vents, rear seat floor vents and
    8.
    demister vents.
    9. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the
    vehicle.
    Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Press to
    10.
    activate/deactivate the passenger heated seat. See Heated seats in the
    Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
    Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
    11.
    in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
    cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
    odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
    automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in
    (defrost). When the ignition switch is
    any airflow mode except
    turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the recirculated
    air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air
    (panel) or
    (panel/floor).
    distribution selection is either
    12. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
    vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
    economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
    undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button
    again for normal A/C operation.
    13. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
    recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
    (defrost) and
    engages automatically in MAX A/C,
    (floor/defrost).
    Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Press to
    14.
    activate/deactivate the driver heated seat. See Heated seats in the
    Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.

    43

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 44

    Climate Controls
    Operating tips
    • To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
    (defrost) or
    (floor/defrost).
    select
    • To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
    (recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.
    system off or with
    • Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
    airflow to the back seats.
    • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
    the windshield.
    • To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather, drive with the
    windows slightly open for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the
    vehicle has been “aired out.”
    • A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
    air distribution setting that is selected.
    During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
    extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
    the MAX A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting
    and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) gear position
    (automatic transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your
    A/C system.
    For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
    1. Select MAX A/C.
    2. Select the coolest temperature setting.
    3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially. As the interior starts to cool
    down, adjust the fan speed to maintain comfort.
    To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
    1. Select

    .

    2. Select A/C.
    3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
    4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
    5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
    To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
    located in the middle of the instrument panel.
    44

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 45

    Climate Controls
    REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R
    The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
    works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
    The engine must be running to operate the rear window defroster.
    to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light on the
    Press R
    control will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster turns off
    automatically after a predetermined amount of time, if a low battery
    condition is detected or when the ignition is turned off or to the
    accessory position. To manually turn off the rear window defroster at any
    time, press the control again.
    If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,
    the same control will activate both. Refer to Heated outside mirrors in
    the Driver Controls chapter.
    Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
    of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside or the
    rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
    will not be covered by your warranty.

    45

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 46

    Lights
    HEADLAMP CONTROL
    Turns the lamps off.
    Turns on the parking lamps,
    instrument panel lamps, license
    plate lamps and tail lamps.
    Turns the low beam headlamps
    on.

    Fog lamp control (if equipped)
    The fog lamps can be turned on
    when the headlamp control is in
    or
    position and the
    the
    high beams are not turned on.
    With the key in the on position, pull
    the headlamp control towards you
    to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
    on the headlamp
    indicator light
    control will illuminate.
    High beams
    Push the lever toward the
    instrument panel to activate. Pull
    the lever towards you to deactivate.

    OFF

    46

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 47

    Lights
    Flash-to-pass
    Pull toward you slightly to activate
    and release to deactivate.

    Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
    Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
    To activate:
    • the ignition must be in the on position and
    • the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position.
    WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
    dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
    (DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
    provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
    your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
    PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
    Use to adjust the brightness of the
    instrument panel and all applicable
    switches in the vehicle during
    headlamp and parking lamp
    operation.
    Move the control to the full upright
    position, past detent, to turn on the
    interior lamps.
    Note: If the battery is disconnected,
    discharged, or a new battery is
    installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
    switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
    This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
    conditions.
    47

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 48

    Lights
    AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
    The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
    If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
    should be checked by your authorized dealer.
    Vertical aim adjustment
    1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
    approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
    • (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
    • (2) Center height of lamp to
    ground
    • (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
    • (4) Horizontal reference line
    2. Measure the height from the
    center of your headlamp to the
    ground and mark an 8 foot
    (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
    on the vertical wall or screen at this
    height (a piece of masking tape works well).
    3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
    open the hood.
    4. On the wall or screen you will
    observe an area of high intensity
    light. The top of the high intensity
    area should touch the horizontal
    reference line. If not, the beam will
    need to be adjusted.

    48

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 49

    Lights
    5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
    each headlamp, then use a Phillips
    #2 screwdriver or 10 mm
    wrench/socket to adjust the
    headlamp up or down.
    6. Close the hood and turn off the
    lamps.

    HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
    NON-ADJUSTABLE.
    TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
    • Push down to activate the left
    turn signal.
    • Push up to activate the right turn
    signal.

    INTERIOR LAMPS
    Map lamps
    To turn on the map lamps, press the
    outer edge of the clear lens. The
    map lamp lights when:
    • any door is opened.
    • the remote entry controls are
    pressed and the ignition is off.

    49

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 50

    Lights
    Rear dome lamp
    When the lamp control is in the
    middle position, the rear dome lamp
    will come on when a door is opened
    or the unlock button is pressed on
    the remote keyless entry.
    If the control is moved to the driver
    side position, the lamp will not come
    on at all.
    If the control is moved to the passenger side position, the lamp will stay
    on.
    Ambient lighting (if equipped)
    Illuminates four footwells and three
    cupholders with a choice of several
    colors. The ambient lighting control
    switch is located on the instrument
    panel. To activate, press and release
    the control to cycle through the
    color choices plus the off state.
    The lights come on whenever the
    ignition is in either the on or accessory position.
    Note: The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the
    off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory
    delay timer expires.
    BULB REPLACEMENT
    Lamp assembly condensation
    Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
    Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
    enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
    condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
    condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
    lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
    normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
    weather conditions.

    50

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 51

    Lights
    Examples of acceptable condensation are:
    • Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
    • Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
    Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
    leak) are:
    • Water puddle inside the lamp
    • Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
    the lens
    Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
    unacceptable moisture are present.
    Using the right bulbs
    Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
    must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure
    lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
    correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
    assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
    Function
    Trade number
    Headlamps
    H13
    Park and turn lamp (front)
    3457 NAK or 3457AK
    Side marker lamp (front)
    168
    Fog lamps (if equipped)
    H11 LL
    Stop/turn and tail lamps
    3057K
    Backup lamp
    921
    License plate lamp
    C5W L
    * High-mount brake lamp
    LED
    * To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
    To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
    Replacing interior bulbs
    Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
    Replacing exterior bulbs
    Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
    51

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 52

    Lights
    Replacing headlamp bulbs
    1. Make sure the headlamp control
    is in the off position and open the
    hood.
    2. Remove four push pins from the
    radiator grille and pull the grille
    forward to access the lower screw.
    3. Remove three bolts and washers
    from the headlamp assembly.
    4. Carefully pull the headlamp
    assembly up and away from the
    vehicle to disengage the hidden spring clip located on the bottom of the
    headlamp assembly. This may require substantial upward force.
    5. Disconnect electrical connector from the bulb.
    6. Remove bulb from the headlamp
    assembly by turning it
    counterclockwise, then pull it
    straight out.
    Install the new bulb in reverse
    order. Be sure that the spring clip is
    not damaged or detached from the
    housing during the replacement
    procedure.
    WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
    out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base
    and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
    bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
    Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
    rubbing alcohol before being used.

    52

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 53

    Lights
    Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
    1. Make sure the headlamp control
    is in the off position and open the
    hood.
    2. Remove four push pins from the
    radiator grille and pull the grille
    forward to access the lower screw.
    3. Remove three bolts and washers
    from the headlamp assembly.
    4. Carefully pull the headlamp
    assembly up and away from the
    vehicle to disengage the hidden spring clip located on the bottom of the
    headlamp assembly. This may require substantial upward force.
    5. Remove the bulb socket from the
    lamp assembly by turning
    counterclockwise.
    6. Pull the bulb straight out of the
    socket.
    Install the new bulb in reverse
    order. Be sure that the spring clip is
    not damaged or detached from the
    housing during the replacement procedure.
    Replacing side marker bulbs
    1. Make sure the headlamp control
    is in the off position and open the
    hood.
    2. Remove four push pins from the
    radiator grille and pull the grille
    forward to access the lower screw.
    3. Remove three bolts and washers
    from the headlamp assembly.
    4. Carefully pull the headlamp
    assembly up and away from the
    vehicle to disengage the hidden spring clip located on the bottom of the
    headlamp assembly. This may require substantial upward force.

    53

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 54

    Lights
    5. Remove the bulb socket from the
    lamp assembly by turning
    counterclockwise.
    6. Pull the bulb straight out of the
    socket.
    Install the new bulb in reverse
    order. Be sure that the spring clip is
    not damaged or detached from the
    housing during the replacement procedure.
    Replacing tail/brake/backup lights and turn signal bulbs
    1. Make sure the headlamp control
    is in the off position and then open
    the trunk.
    2. Remove two plastic screws and
    cover from inside the luggage
    compartment.
    3. Remove two nuts from the lamp
    assembly.
    4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle.
    5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it out.
    6. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
    Install the new bulb in reverse order.
    Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
    1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
    in the off position.
    2. Reach under the front fender and
    remove the aeroshield. Then remove
    the harness/bulb assembly from the
    fog lamp by turning it
    counterclockwise.
    3. Disconnect the harness from the
    bulb by pulling it straight out.
    Install the new bulb in reverse order.

    54

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 55

    Lights
    Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
    1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
    in the off position.
    2. Remove the two screws and the
    lens from the license plate lamp
    assembly.
    3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
    out from the lamp assembly.
    Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
    Replacing high-mount brake lamp assembly
    Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is
    designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is
    recommended that you see your authorized dealer.

    55

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 56

    Driver Controls
    MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
    Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
    of the control away from you to
    increase the speed of the wipers;
    rotate towards you to decrease the
    speed of the wipers.

    Windshield washer: Press the end
    of the stalk:
    • briefly: causes a single swipe of
    the wipers without washer fluid.
    • a quick press and hold: the
    wipers will swipe three times with
    washer fluid.
    • a long press and hold: the wipers
    and washer fluid will be activated
    for up to ten seconds.
    Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds
    after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down
    from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.
    Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
    This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
    level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
    This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
    motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
    always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
    blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.

    56

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 57

    Driver Controls
    TILT STEERING WHEEL
    To adjust the steering wheel:
    1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
    steering column.
    2. While the lever is in the down
    position, move the steering wheel
    up or down until you find the
    desired position.
    3. While holding the steering wheel
    in place, pull the lever up to its
    original position to lock the steering
    column.
    WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
    moving.

    ELECTRONIC COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)
    The compass heading is displayed in the center integrated display (CID).
    The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
    buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
    or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
    compass accuracy.
    Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
    correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
    conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
    calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
    adjustment.
    Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
    varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
    degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
    vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
    error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.

    57

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 58

    Driver Controls
    Compass zone adjustment
    1. Determine which magnetic zone
    you are in for your geographic
    location by referring to the zone
    map.
    2. Turn ignition to the on position.

    3 2

    1

    15

    4

    14
    13

    5

    12
    6

    7 8 9 1011

    3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio
    preset buttons together for
    approximately five seconds until
    ZONE XX appears in the CID.

    4. Press and release the 7 and 9
    radio preset buttons together,
    repeatedly until ZONE XX changes
    to the correct zone (1–15) in the
    CID.
    5. The direction will display after
    the buttons are released. The zone
    is now updated.

    Compass calibration adjustment
    Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
    and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
    accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
    vehicle doors are shut.
    1. Start the vehicle.

    58

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 59

    Driver Controls
    2. To calibrate, press and hold the 7
    and 9 radio preset buttons together
    for approximately 10 seconds until
    CAL appears. Release the buttons.

    3. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
    circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
    until the CAL display changes to the
    direction value (N, S, E, W, etc.). It
    may take up to five circles to
    complete calibration.
    4. The compass is now calibrated.
    CENTER CONSOLE
    Your vehicle has a variety of console features. These include:
    • Cupholders
    • Utility compartment
    WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
    can injure you in a collision.
    AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12V DC)
    Power outlet is designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
    any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
    outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
    accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
    outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
    The auxiliary power points are located near the bottom of the center
    stack.
    Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
    equipped).
    To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
    over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC/180W. If the power point or cigar
    lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
    relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
    checking and replacing fuses.
    59

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 60

    Driver Controls
    To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
    be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
    the battery from being discharged:
    • do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
    not running,
    • do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
    other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
    extended periods.
    Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
    POWER WINDOWS
    WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
    do not let children play with the power windows. They may
    seriously injure themselves.
    WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
    they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
    pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
    Press and pull the window switches
    to open and close windows.
    • Press down (to the first detent)
    and hold the switch to open.
    • Pull up (to the first detent) and
    hold the switch to close.
    One-touch down
    Allows the driver’s window to open fully without holding the control
    down. Press the switch completely down to the second detent and
    release quickly. The window will open fully. Momentarily press the switch
    to any position to stop the window operation.

    60

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 61

    Driver Controls
    Window lock (if equipped)
    The window lock feature allows only
    the driver to operate the power
    windows.
    To lock out all the window controls
    (except for the driver’s) press the
    right side of the control. Press the
    left side to restore the window
    controls.
    INTERIOR MIRROR
    The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
    which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
    WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
    motion.
    Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
    The interior rear view mirror has an auto-dimming function. The
    electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal (high reflective)
    state to the non-glare (darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach
    the mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle,
    it will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
    The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
    vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
    backing up.
    Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
    rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
    performance.
    Note: A rear center passenger and/or raised rear center headrest (if
    equipped) may also block the light from reaching the sensor.
    Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
    abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.

    61

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 62

    Driver Controls
    EXTERIOR MIRRORS
    Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
    WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
    motion.
    To adjust your mirrors:
    1. Rotate the control clockwise to
    adjust the right mirror and rotate
    the control counterclockwise to
    adjust the left mirror.
    2. Move the control in the direction
    you wish to tilt the mirror.
    3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
    Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
    Both mirrors are heated
    automatically to remove ice, mist
    and fog when the rear window
    defrost is activated.
    Do not remove ice from the
    mirrors with a scraper or
    attempt to readjust the mirror
    glass if it is frozen in place.
    These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
    Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
    abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
    SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
    With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
    your foot on the accelerator pedal.
    WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
    roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.

    62

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 63

    Driver Controls
    Using speed control
    The speed controls are located on the steering wheel. The following
    buttons work with speed control:
    RESUME: Press to resume a set
    RESUME
    speed.
    SET +
    SET +: Press to set a speed or
    increase a set speed.
    SET SET –: Press to decrease a set
    OFF
    ON
    speed.
    OFF: Press to turn speed control
    off.
    ON: Press to turn speed control on.
    Setting speed control
    To set speed control:
    1. Press and release ON.
    2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
    3. Press and release SET +.
    4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
    5. The indicator
    light on the instrument cluster will turn on.
    Note:
    • Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
    steep hill.
    • If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
    may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
    • If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
    your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
    Disengaging speed control
    To disengage the speed control, press the brake pedal or press the clutch
    pedal (if equipped). Disengaging the speed control will not erase
    previous set speed.
    Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,
    the engine speed may briefly increase; this is normal.
    Resuming a set speed
    Press and release RESUME. This will automatically return the vehicle to
    the previously set speed.
    63

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 64

    Driver Controls
    Increasing speed while using speed control
    To set a higher speed:
    • Press and hold SET + until you get to the desired speed, then release.
    You can also use SET + to operate the tap-up function. Press and
    release SET + to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
    increments.
    • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed, then press and
    release SET +.
    Reducing speed while using speed control
    To reduce a set speed:
    • Press and hold SET – until you get to the desired speed, then release.
    You can also us SET – to operate the tap-down function. Press and
    release SET – to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
    increments.
    • Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached, then
    press and release SET +.
    Turning off speed control
    To turn off the speed control, press and release OFF or turn off the
    ignition.
    Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
    control set speed memory is erased.
    STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
    Radio control features
    VOL + (Volume): Press to increase
    the volume.
    VOL – (Volume): Press to decrease
    the volume.

    VOL +

    VOL -

    (Seek): Press to select
    MEDIA
    the previous/next radio station
    preset, CD track or satellite radio
    channel preset (if equipped) depending on which media mode you are
    in.
    MEDIA: Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes.
    64

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 65

    Driver Controls
    SYNC௡ hands free control
    feature (if equipped)
    briefly to use the voice
    Press
    command feature. You will hear a
    tone and LISTENING will appear in
    the radio display. Press and
    to exit voice command.
    hold
    to activate phone mode or
    Press
    answer a phone call. Press and
    to end call or exit phone
    hold
    mode.
    to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
    Press
    OK to confirm your selection.
    For further information on the SYNC௡ system, refer to the SYNC௡
    supplement.
    MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
    You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up to
    ventilate the vehicle.
    WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
    children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
    themselves.
    The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express
    opening and closing feature. To stop motion at any time during the
    one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
    Note: The moon roof will open to the “comfort” position first before
    opening all the way. The “comfort” position helps to alleviate rumbling
    wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened.

    65

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 66

    Driver Controls
    To open the moon roof: Press and
    release the SLIDE control. The
    moon roof will open to the
    “comfort” position. Press and
    release the control again to fully
    open. Press the switch again to stop
    the moon roof.
    WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that
    it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
    not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.
    To close the moon roof: Pull and release the SLIDE control, the moon
    roof will close automatically. Press the switch again to stop the moon
    roof.
    Bounce-back: When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof
    opening as the moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically
    open and stop at a prescribed position.
    Bounce-back override: To override bounce-back function, pull and hold
    the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce-back event. The
    closing force will begin to increase each time the moon roof is closed for
    the first three closing cycles, with bounce-back active. For example:
    Bounce-back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon
    roof or seals
    To vent the moon roof: Press and release the TILT control, the moon
    roof will move to the vent position automatically. Press the switch again
    to stop the moon roof. Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moon
    roof.
    The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
    or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
    the front of the vehicle.
    Relearning function: In case the moon roof does not close properly
    anymore, follow this relearning procedure.
    • Tilt the moon roof into the vent position as far as possible. Release the
    switch.
    • Press and hold the same switch again for 30 seconds until you see the
    moon roof move.
    66

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 67

    Driver Controls
    • Release the switch and immediately press and hold it again. The moon
    roof will close, open fully and then close again. Do not release the
    switch before the moon roof has reached the closed position for the
    second time.
    Safety mode: If the system detects a malfunction, it enters a safety
    mode. The moon roof will move about 0.5 seconds at a time and then
    stop again. Press the switch repeatedly until the moon roof is closed.
    Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
    POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT
    WARNING: Do not install additional floor mats on top of the
    factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the
    accelerator or the brake pedals.
    Position the floor mat so that the
    eyelet is over the retention post and
    press down to lock in. Make sure
    that the mat does not interfere with
    the operation of the accelerator or
    the brake pedal. To remove the floor
    mat, reverse the installation
    procedure.

    INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
    To open the trunk, press the control
    on the driver’s side kick panel,
    located below the instrument panel.

    67

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 68

    Locks and Security
    KEYS
    One key operates all the locks and starts the vehicle. Always carry a
    spare key with you in case of an emergency.
    Your keys are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
    will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
    supplied keys, replacement keys are available through your authorized
    dealer. Refer to the SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft system section later
    in this chapter for more information.
    MYKEY™
    The MyKey™ feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to
    promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
    vehicle can be activated as a MyKey™. The key will remain restricted
    until MyKey™ is cleared. Any remaining keys are referred to as an
    “administrator key” or admin key. The admin key can be used to create a
    MyKey™, program optional MyKey™ settings, and clear the MyKey™
    feature. When the MyKey™ feature is enabled the user can use system
    check in the message center to see how many MyKeys™ and admin keys
    are programmed to the vehicle, and see the total distance the vehicle has
    been driven with the MyKey™ active.
    MyKey™ restricted features
    Standard settings – these settings cannot be changed
    • Belt-Minder cannot be disabled. The audio system will be muted
    whenever Belt-Minder௡ is activated until the safety belts are buckled.
    Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for a detailed
    description of Belt-Minder௡ operation.
    • Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a
    chime when the distance to empty value reaches 75 miles (120 km).
    • The following systems, if equipped, cannot be turned off: reverse
    sensing system, Blind Spot Information System (BLIS௡) with cross
    traffic alert and collision warning system.
    Optional settings – these settings can be changed
    • Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
    displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached
    80 mph (130 km/h).
    • Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected
    vehicle speed of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) is exceeded.
    • The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45%. MYKEY
    VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the audio system display when
    attempting to exceed the limited volume.
    68

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 69

    Locks and Security
    • The AdvanceTrac௡ system cannot be turned off. When this optional
    setting is on, the MyKey™ user will not be able to deactivate the
    system. Note: It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac௡
    system if the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand.
    Create a MyKey™
    To program MyKey™ on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle,
    insert the key that you want to make a MyKey™ into the ignition. For
    vehicles equipped with push button start, put the intelligent access key
    in the backup slot; see the Driving chapter for the location of the
    backup slot. Turn the ignition on. Use the message center buttons to do
    the following:
    1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
    2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
    MYKEY will be displayed.
    3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
    AS RESTRICTED is displayed.
    4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed.
    MyKey™ is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
    distinguish it from the admin keys. Note: To program the optional
    settings go to Step 2 in the Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
    section. If your vehicle is equipped with remote start, see the Using
    MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems section.
    Note: The MyKey™ can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was
    created, otherwise a standard key (administrator key) is required to
    clear the MyKey™ programming. To clear all MyKeys™ go to Step 2 in
    the Clear MyKey™ section.
    Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
    Turn the ignition on using an admin key. To program the optional
    settings, use the message center buttons to do the following:
    1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed.
    2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus.
    The first menu shown is:
    MYKEY MAX MPH <80 MPH> OFF
    3. If you don’t want to change the maximum speed setting, press the
    SETUP button to display the next menu. The remaining menus appear as
    follows with the default settings shown:
    MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 <OFF>
    MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT <ON> OFF
    MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON <OFF>.
    69

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 70

    Locks and Security
    4. On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the
    <…>.
    5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
    displayed.
    6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional
    settings.
    Clear MyKey™
    To reset all MyKeys™ as admin keys, do the following:
    1. Turn the vehicle on using the admin key.
    2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
    3. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
    CLEAR is displayed.
    4. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS
    CLEARED is displayed.
    Check MyKey™ system status
    The vehicle system check will provide the status of the following
    MyKey™ parameters:
    • MYKEY MILES — This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey™
    is used. If mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the
    MyKey™ is not being used by the intended user. The only way to
    reset this odometer to zero is by clearing MyKey™. If this odometer is
    lower than the last time you checked, then the MyKey™ system has
    been recently cleared.
    • # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many MyKeys™ are
    programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect deletion of a
    MyKey™.
    • # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many admin keys
    are programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect if an additional
    spare key has been programmed to the vehicle.
    Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey™
    system warnings displays.
    Using MyKey™ with remote start systems
    MyKey™ is not compatible with non-Ford approved aftermarket remote
    start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
    your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system.
    70

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 71

    Locks and Security
    Vehicles equipped with traditional keys:
    When using a Ford-approved remote start system, the default settings
    will recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with
    its associated privileges. Owners of vehicles equipped with traditional
    keys should program the remote start system as a MyKey™ in addition
    to the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey™. To
    program the remote start system as MyKey™, do the following:
    1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
    2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
    3. Follow Steps 1-4 in the Create a MyKey™ section.
    Vehicles equipped with an intelligent access key
    (push button start)
    • It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey™ on
    vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start).
    Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any
    other admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the
    system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift
    the vehicle into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have
    administrative privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will
    identify the user as an admin or MyKey™ driver depending on the
    settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle.
    Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
    ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey™ system
    status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in
    the total count. See the Check MyKey™ system status section.
    Note: For all vehicles with remote start installed, it is possible to
    program all ’real’ keys as MyKeys™, in which case, you will need to use
    your remote start system to reset all MyKeys™ as admin keys by doing
    the following:
    1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
    2. Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
    3. Follow Steps 1-4 in the Clear MyKey™ section.

    71

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 72

    Locks and Security
    Troubleshooting
    Condition
    Can’t create a
    MyKey™

    Cannot program
    the MyKey™
    optional settings

    Cannot clear
    MyKey™

    Lost the only
    admin key
    Lost any key
    I accidentally
    programmed all
    keys as
    MyKeys™

    Potential Causes
    • Key in the ignition is already a MyKey™.
    • Key in the ignition is the last remaining admin key
    (there always has to be at least one admin key).
    • Intelligent access key (if equipped) not in the
    backup slot — for vehicles with push button start.
    •SecuriLock௡ Passive Anti-Theft System is disabled
    or in unlimited mode
    • Vehicle has been started using a remote start
    system that is programmed as MyKey™. Refer to
    Using MyKey™ with remote start systems section.
    • Key in the ignition is a MyKey™
    • No MyKeys™ are programmed to the vehicle.
    Refer to Create a MyKey™ section
    • Vehicle has been started using a remote start
    system that is programmed as a MyKey™. Refer to
    Using MyKey™ with remote start systems section.
    • Key in the ignition is a MyKey™
    • No MyKeys™ are programmed to the vehicle.
    Refer to Create a MyKey™ section
    • Vehicle has been started using a remote start
    system that is programmed as a MyKey™. Refer to
    MyKey™ with remote start systems section.
    • Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer
    • For programming spare keys, refer to the
    Programming spare keys section in this chapter.
    • Vehicle has a remote start system that is
    recognized as an admin key. Refer to the Using
    MyKey™ with remote start systems section to
    reset all MyKeys™ as admin keys.

    72

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 73

    Locks and Security
    Condition
    No MyKey™
    function with
    intelligent access
    key (push button
    start) (if
    equipped)
    MyKey™
    programmed
    total includes
    one additional
    key
    Admin keys
    programmed
    total includes
    one additional
    key
    MyKey™ miles
    do not
    accumulate

    Potential Causes
    • An admin key is present at vehicle start
    • No MyKeys™ are programmed to the vehicle.
    Refer to Create a MyKey™ section

    • Unknown key has been programmed to the
    vehicle as a MyKey™.
    • Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system.
    Refer to Using MyKey™ with remote start systems
    section.
    • Unknown key has been programmed to the
    vehicle as admin key.
    • Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system.
    Refer to Using MyKey™ with remote start systems
    section.
    • MyKey™ is not being used by the intended user.
    • MyKey™ system has been recently cleared.

    POWER DOOR LOCKS
    • Press the
    doors.

    control to unlock all

    • Press the
    doors.

    control to lock all

    Smart locks
    This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle
    if your key is still in the ignition.
    When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the
    power door lock control (on the driver or passenger door trim panel), all
    the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically unlock reminding
    you that your key is still in the ignition.
    73

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 74

    Locks and Security
    The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, by locking
    the driver’s door with a key or using the lock control on the remote
    entry key fob.
    If both front doors are closed, the vehicle can be locked from any
    method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
    Autolock (if equipped)
    The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
    • all doors are closed,
    • the ignition is on,
    • you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
    • the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
    The autolock feature repeats when:
    • any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle
    speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
    • the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
    Deactivating/activating autolock
    Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled. There are three
    methods to enable/disable this feature:
    • Through your authorized dealer, or
    • Performing the power door lock control procedure, or
    • Performing the message center (if equipped) procedure. Refer to
    Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
    Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
    of the autounlock feature.
    Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
    that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is in the off position, and
    all vehicle doors are closed.

    74

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 75

    Locks and Security
    Power door unlock/lock procedure
    Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
    doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
    procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
    repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
    1. Place the key in the ignition and
    turn the ignition to the on position.
    control
    2. Press the power door
    on the door panel three times.
    3. Turn the ignition from the on
    position to the off position.
    control
    4. Press the power door
    on the door panel three times.
    5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
    to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
    6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
    press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
    deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
    activated.
    7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
    confirm the procedure is complete.
    Autounlock feature (if equipped)
    The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
    • the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
    vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
    • the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
    off or accessory position; and
    • the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
    transitioned to the off or accessory position.
    Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
    electronically locked before the driver door is opened.

    75

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 76

    Locks and Security
    Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
    Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are
    three methods to enable/disable this feature:
    • Through your authorized dealer,
    • by using a power door unlock/lock sequence
    • or by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
    center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
    Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
    independently of the autolock feature.
    Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
    Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
    doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
    procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
    repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
    1. Place the key in the ignition and
    turn the ignition to the on position.
    control
    2. Press the power door
    on the door panel three times.
    3. Turn the ignition from the on
    position to the off position.
    control
    4. Press the power door
    on the door panel three times.
    5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
    to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
    6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
    press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
    deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
    activated.
    7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
    confirm the procedure is complete.

    76

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 77

    Locks and Security
    CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
    • When these locks are set, the
    rear doors cannot be opened from
    the inside.
    • The rear doors can be opened
    from the outside when the
    childproof door locks are set, but
    the doors are unlocked.
    The childproof locks are located on
    the rear edge of each rear door and
    must be set separately for each
    door. Setting the lock for one door
    will not automatically set the lock
    for both doors.
    • Insert the key and turn to the
    lock position (key horizontal) to
    engage the childproof locks.
    • Insert the key and turn to the
    unlock position (key vertical) to disengage the childproof locks.
    INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
    Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
    release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
    the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
    Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
    location of the release handle.

    77

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 78

    Locks and Security
    To open the luggage compartment
    door (lid) from within the luggage
    compartment, pull the illuminated
    “T” shaped handle and push up on
    the trunk lid. The handle is
    composed of a material that will
    glow for hours in darkness following
    brief exposure to ambient light.
    The “T” shaped handle will be
    located either on the luggage
    compartment door (lid) or inside
    the luggage compartment near the
    tail lamps.

    WARNING: Keep vehicle
    doors and luggage
    compartment locked and keep
    keys and remote transmitters out
    of a child’s reach. Unsupervised
    children could lock themselves in
    the trunk and risk injury. Children
    should be taught not to play in
    vehicles.

    WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
    unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
    trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
    animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
    death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
    children are particularly at risk.

    78

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 79

    Locks and Security
    REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
    This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of
    Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
    (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
    must accept any interference received, including interference that may
    cause undesired operation.
    Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
    responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
    operate the equipment.
    The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
    approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
    be caused by:
    • weather conditions,
    • nearby radio towers,
    • structures around the vehicle, or
    • other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
    Your vehicle may have an all-door remote entry system.
    The all-door remote entry system
    allows you to:
    • lock or unlock all vehicle doors
    without a key.
    • open the luggage compartment
    without a key.
    • activate the panic alarm.
    The remote entry lock/unlock
    feature operates in any ignition
    position except start. The panic feature operates with the key in the off
    position.
    If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
    ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in
    order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
    Unlocking the doors
    1. Press
    and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
    lamps and parking lamps will illuminate.
    2. With the all-door remote entry, press
    three seconds to unlock all the doors.

    and release again within
    79

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 80

    Locks and Security
    The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature. This
    feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
    to the on position. The dome lamp control must be set to the ON
    position in order for the illuminated entry feature to operate.
    Programming unlocking mode (if equipped)
    The unlocking mode on the remote entry transmitter can be
    programmed. To change the unlocking mode from the single-door
    unlocking mode to the central all-door unlocking mode:
    • With the vehicle in the off position, press
    and
    on the remote
    entry transmitter simultaneously and hold for four seconds. The turn
    lamps will illuminate twice to indicate the mode change.
    • Press the
    and
    on the remote entry transmitter simultaneously
    and hold for four seconds to switch between unlocking modes.
    Locking the doors
    • Press
    and release to lock all doors. Note: The parking lamps will
    illuminate. If any door or trunk is ajar, the lamps will not illuminate.
    Once the door that was ajar is closed, the lamps will illuminate to
    indicate that the vehicle is locked and all doors are closed.
    • Press
    and release again within three seconds to confirm all doors
    have locked. Note: The horn will honk once and the turn lamps will
    illuminate if all doors are closed. The horn will honk twice if any door
    is ajar.
    Car finder
    Press
    twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
    lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
    your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
    Sounding a panic alarm
    Press
    to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to the on
    or accessory position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time out in
    three minutes.
    Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off
    position.
    Opening the luggage compartment
    Press
    once to open the luggage compartment. Note: This feature
    will only operate with the ignition in the off or the accessory position.
    80

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 81

    Locks and Security
    • Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
    vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
    out or block the driver’s rear view.
    Replacing the battery
    The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
    battery CR2032 or equivalent.
    To replace the battery:
    1. Twist a thin coin between the two
    halves of the remote entry
    transmitter near the key ring. DO
    NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
    AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
    FRONT HOUSING OF THE
    REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.

    2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
    battery terminals on the back
    surface of the circuit board.
    3. Remove the old battery.
    Note: Please refer to local
    regulations when disposing of
    transmitter batteries.
    4. Insert the new battery. Refer to
    the diagram inside the remote entry
    transmitter for the correct
    orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the
    battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
    5. Snap the two halves back together.
    Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
    to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
    should operate normally after battery replacement.
    Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
    If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
    because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
    transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
    remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
    reprogramming.
    81

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 82

    Locks and Security
    How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
    You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
    available before beginning this procedure. If all remote entry transmitters
    are not present during the programming procedure, the transmitters that
    are not present during programming will no longer operate the vehicle.
    Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not pressed during this sequence.
    To reprogram the remote entry transmitters:
    1. Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.
    2. Put the key in the ignition.
    3. Turn the key from the 1 (off)
    position to 3 (on).
    4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
    10 seconds) between the 1 (off)
    position and 3 (on).
    Note: The eighth turn must end in
    the 3 (on) position.
    5. The doors will lock, then unlock,
    to confirm that the programming mode has been activated.
    6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
    Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
    procedure over again.
    7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
    transmitter has been programmed.
    8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
    9. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position after you have finished
    programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
    10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
    mode has been exited.
    Illuminated entry
    The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
    system is used to unlock the door(s).
    The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
    • the ignition is turned to the on position,
    • the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
    • after 25 seconds of illumination.
    82

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 83

    Locks and Security
    The lights will not turn off if:
    • they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
    • any door is open.
    Illuminated exit
    • When all vehicle doors and the trunk are closed, and the key is
    removed from the ignition, the interior lamps and parking lamps will
    illuminate.
    The lamps will turn off if all the doors and the trunk remain closed and
    • 25 seconds elapse, or
    • the key is inserted in the ignition.
    Battery saver
    The battery saver will shut off the lamps 30 minutes after the ignition
    has been turned to the 1 (off) position.
    • If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
    battery saver will shut off them off 30 minutes after the ignition has
    been turned to the 1 (off) position.
    • If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
    was opened, the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the
    ignition has been turned to the 1 (off) position.
    • The battery saver will shut off the headlamps and fog lamps
    10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (off) position.
    SECURILOCKா PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
    SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
    system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
    started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
    use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
    Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
    purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
    program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
    yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
    program the coded key.
    Note: The SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
    non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
    result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
    83

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 84

    Locks and Security
    Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
    purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
    key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
    objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
    objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
    momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
    engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
    the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
    Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
    take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
    Anti-theft indicator
    The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
    • When the ignition is in the off
    position, the indicator will flash
    once every two seconds to
    indicate the SecuriLock௡ system
    is functioning as a theft
    deterrent.
    • When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
    three seconds, then turn off, to indicate normal system functionality.
    If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock௡ system, the indicator will flash
    rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
    occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no
    electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t
    start, try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful
    contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator
    still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, and the vehicle will not start,
    contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
    Replacement keys
    If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
    you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
    key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
    need to be programmed.
    Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
    away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
    inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
    spare or replacement keys.
    84

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 85

    Locks and Security
    Programming spare keys
    You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and
    understand the entire procedure before you begin.
    Tips:
    • A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
    • Only use SecuriLock௡ keys.
    • You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
    already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
    key(s) readily accessible.
    • If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
    take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
    programmed.
    1. Insert a previously programmed
    coded key into the ignition.
    2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off)
    position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
    the ignition in the 3 (on) position
    for at least one second, but no more
    than 10 seconds.
    3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off)
    position.
    4. Remove the previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
    5. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the previously
    programmed coded key, insert the other previously programmed coded
    key into the ignition.
    6. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
    the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second but not more
    than 10 seconds.
    7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position.
    8. Remove the previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
    9. After three seconds but within twenty seconds of removing the
    previously programmed coded key, insert the unprogrammed key
    (new/valet key) into the ignition.

    85

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 86

    Locks and Security
    10. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position.
    Keep the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second, but no
    more than 10 seconds.
    11. Your new, unprogrammed key is now programmed.
    If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
    engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
    then go out.
    If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
    vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off, or stay
    on for more than three seconds. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to
    your authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
    To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure
    from Step 1 for each additional key.
    Note: To program MyKey features, refer to MyKey in this chapter.
    PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
    The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
    unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
    If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
    ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized
    dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
    Arming the system
    When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
    attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
    park/turn lamps and will sound the horn.
    The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
    ignition. Either of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
    • Press the lock control on the remote entry transmitter.
    • Open a door and press the power door lock control to lock all the
    doors, and then close the door.

    86

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 87

    Locks and Security
    Disarming the system
    You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
    control on your remote entry
    • Unlock the doors by pressing the
    transmitter.
    • Turn the ignition to the on or start position with a programmed coded
    ignition key.
    • Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter. This will only
    shut off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding. The
    alarm system will still be armed.
    • If using a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle, a chime will
    sound when you open the door and you will have 12 seconds to
    disarm the alarm system using any of the actions above, otherwise the
    alarm will trigger.
    Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
    mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
    Triggering the anti-theft system
    The armed system will be triggered if any door, trunk or the hood is
    opened without using the key or the remote entry transmitter.

    87

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 88

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    FRONT SEATING
    WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
    slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
    injuries in the event of a collision.
    WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
    reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
    WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
    position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
    behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
    position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
    unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
    collision.
    First-row adjustable head restraints
    Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
    vertically adjustable.
    WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
    crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
    and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
    proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
    while the vehicle is in motion.
    The adjustable head restraints
    consist of :
    • a trimmed energy absorbing foam
    and structure (1),
    • two steel stems (2),
    • a guide sleeve adjust release
    button (3),
    • and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
    button (4).

    88

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 89

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
    1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
    2. Raise the head restraint by
    pulling up on the head restraint.

    3. Lower the head restraint by
    pressing and holding the guide
    sleeve adjust release button and
    pushing down on the head restraint.

    Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
    even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
    back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
    head restraint to its full up position.
    WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
    Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
    when the seat is occupied.

    89

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 90

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
    1. Pull up the head restraint until it
    reaches the highest adjustment
    position.

    2. Simultaneously press and hold
    both the adjust/release button and
    the unlock/remove button, then pull
    up on the head restraint.

    To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
    1. Insert the two stems into the
    guide sleeve collars.
    2. Push the head restraint down
    until it locks.

    Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
    even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
    back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
    head restraint to its full up position.

    90

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 91

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
    crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
    Adjusting the front manual seat
    WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
    back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
    and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
    serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
    seatback, with your feet on the floor.
    WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
    hang objects off seat back or stow objects in map pocket (if
    equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place
    objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and
    the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag off” or
    “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front
    passenger sensing system chapter for additional details. Failure to
    follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat
    sensing system.
    Pull the lever located under the
    front edge of the seat to move the
    seat forward or backward.

    91

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 92

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Pull up on the control to raise the
    seat and push down on the control
    to lower the seat.

    Lift the control to adjust the angle
    of the seatback.

    WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
    slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
    injuries in the event of a collision.

    92

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 93

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Heated seats (if equipped)
    WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
    because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
    injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
    conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
    heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
    for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
    insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
    cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
    needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
    element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
    seat may cause serious personal injury.
    Note: Do not do the following:
    • Place heavy objects on the seat
    • Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
    seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
    To operate the heated seats:
    • Press the button located on the
    instrument panel to activate.
    • Press again to deactivate.

    The heated seats will activate when the ignition is in the on position and
    the engine is running.
    The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes.

    93

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 94

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Tip/slide front passenger seat (if equipped)
    Lift the control and fold the
    seatback forward.
    The seat can be slid forward to
    allow easier entry to the rear seats.
    Slide the seat back and fold back
    the seatback until it locks with a
    distinct click. Rock the seat to
    ensure that the catch is securely
    engaged.
    WARNING: Do not place objects behind the seat which could
    prevent the engagement of the seat lock.
    REAR SEATS
    Second row head restraints
    Your vehicle is equipped with second row outboard head restraints that
    are vertically adjustable.
    WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
    crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
    and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
    proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
    while the vehicle is in motion.
    The adjustable head restraints
    1
    consist of :
    • a trimmed energy absorbing foam
    and structure (1),
    2
    • two steel stems (2),
    • a guide sleeve adjust release
    button (3),
    3
    4
    • and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
    button (4).
    The second row head restraints function the same as the first row head
    restraints. For details about how to raise, lower and remove the second
    row head restraints, refer to First row adjustable head restraints at
    the beginning of this chapter.
    94

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 95

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Folding down the rear seat
    One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional
    cargo space.
    To lower the seatback(s) from inside the vehicle, do the following:
    1. Lower the head restraint (if equipped) to the lowest position.
    2. Pull the strap located on the
    inboard side of the seatback
    (passenger side) or on the outboard
    side of the seatback (driver side) to
    release it.
    3. Fold the seatback down.

    When raising the seatback(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into
    place.
    WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
    position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
    behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
    position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
    unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
    collision.
    SAFETY RESTRAINTS
    Personal Safety System™
    The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
    crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
    reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
    different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
    appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
    a variety of frontal crash situations.
    Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
    • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
    • Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
    and safety belt usage sensors.
    95

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 96

    Seating and Safety Restraints








    Driver’s seat position sensor.
    Front crash severity sensor.
    Front passenger sensing system
    “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
    Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
    Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
    The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
    pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
    sensor, and indicator lights.

    How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
    The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
    vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and conditions. A
    collection of crash sensors provides information to the Restraints Control
    Module (RCM). During a crash, the RCM may activate the safety belt
    pretensioners and/or either none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage
    airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and conditions.
    The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
    seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
    the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined the
    accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
    appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
    to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
    side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
    longitudinal deceleration.
    Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
    The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
    inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
    common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
    the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
    (SRS) section in this chapter.
    Front crash severity sensor
    The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
    severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
    information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
    allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
    levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
    dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
    96

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 97

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Driver’s seat position sensor
    The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
    tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
    position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
    close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
    Front passenger sensing system
    For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
    force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
    to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
    in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
    very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
    occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats
    and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way
    to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants
    are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are
    much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in
    the front.
    WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
    NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
    bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
    the seat all the way back.
    WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
    a rear seating position and always properly use appropriate child
    restraints.
    The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
    passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small
    (child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are
    improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
    proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
    technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
    restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag
    when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of
    the airbag(s) after a collision.
    When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
    turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
    will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
    airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
    supplemental restraints (SRS) section of this chapter.
    97

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 98

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Front safety belt usage sensors
    The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
    front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
    allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and
    safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
    Front outboard safety belt pretensioners
    The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
    designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
    during frontal collisions, and in side collisions when the side air curtain
    system activates. This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts.
    In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone
    or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
    Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors
    The front safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be
    pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in
    response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the
    risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load
    on the occupant. Refer to the Energy management feature section in
    this chapter.
    Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
    The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
    cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
    to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
    chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not
    required.
    The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
    and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
    safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, front
    passenger sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In
    addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the
    instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or
    more of the following.
    • The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
    • The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
    turned on.
    • A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
    periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
    98

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 99

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
    Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
    serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
    collision.
    Safety belt precautions
    WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
    and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
    WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
    where they can be properly restrained.
    WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
    while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
    child from injury in a collision.
    WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
    should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
    bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
    WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
    inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
    these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
    allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
    with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
    seat and using a safety belt properly.
    WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
    significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
    WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
    safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
    tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
    on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
    arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
    shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
    99

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 100

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
    should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
    WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
    women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
    accident.
    Combination lap and shoulder belts
    1. Insert the belt tongue into the
    proper buckle (the buckle closest to
    the direction the tongue is coming
    from) until you hear a snap and feel
    it latch. Make sure the tongue is
    securely fastened in the buckle.

    2. To unfasten, press the release
    button and remove the tongue from
    the buckle.

    Restraint of pregnant women
    WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright
    and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
    safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
    shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
    chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See figure
    below.
    100

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 101

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Pregnant women should always
    wear their safety belt. The lap belt
    portion of a combination lap and
    shoulder belt should be positioned
    low across the hips below the belly
    and worn as tight as comfort will
    allow. The shoulder belt should be
    positioned to cross the middle of
    the shoulder and the center of the
    chest.
    Energy management feature
    • This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
    feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
    the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
    • This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
    pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to
    help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
    Safety Belt Locking Modes
    All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
    belts. The driver safety belt has the first locking mode and the front
    outboard passenger and rear seat outboard safety belts have both types
    of locking modes described as follows:
    Vehicle sensitive mode
    This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
    adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
    movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
    sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
    (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
    forward movement of the driver and passengers.
    In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
    too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
    out again in a slow and controlled manner.
    Automatic locking mode
    In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
    still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
    locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
    101

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 102

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    When to use the automatic locking mode
    This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
    booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
    12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
    position whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or
    Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
    How to use the automatic locking mode
    • Buckle the combination lap and
    shoulder belt.

    • Grasp the shoulder portion and
    pull downward until the entire
    belt is pulled out.

    • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
    sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
    mode.
    How to disengage the automatic locking mode
    Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
    completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
    vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

    102

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 103

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
    all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
    dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child
    seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
    checked for proper function.
    WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
    REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
    retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
    properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
    belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
    collisions.
    Safety belts with locking cinch tongue (rear center position only)
    The locking cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when
    the belt is in the stowed position or while putting safety belts on. When
    the locking cinch tongue of the lap/shoulder combination safety belt is
    latched into the buckle, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to
    become shorter, but locks the webbing in place to restrict it from
    becoming longer.
    Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt
    having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
    belt portion of it.
    1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
    some webbing out of the shoulder
    belt retractor.
    2. While holding the webbing below
    the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
    portion) of the tongue so that it is
    parallel to the webbing and slide the
    tongue upward.
    3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
    buckle.
    How to fasten the cinch tongue
    1. Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
    the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and
    chest.
    103

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 104

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
    3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
    until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
    4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
    the tongue.
    WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
    around the hips, not across the waist.
    WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
    women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
    accident.
    WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
    safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
    tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
    on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
    arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
    shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
    While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
    belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you
    brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 8 km/h
    (5 mph) or more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce
    your forward movement.
    Front safety belt height adjustment
    Adjust the height of the shoulder
    belt so the belt rests across the
    middle of your shoulder.
    To adjust the shoulder belt height,
    squeeze the buttons and slide the
    height adjuster up or down. Release
    the button and pull down on the
    height adjuster to make sure it is
    locked in place.

    104

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 105

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
    belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
    the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
    and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
    Safety belt pretensioner
    Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
    front outboard passenger seating positions.
    The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
    occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
    WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system
    (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
    replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
    deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and side air
    curtains, and safety belt pretensioners.
    Safety belt extension assembly
    If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
    (20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
    611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
    Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
    belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
    the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
    short for you when fully extended.
    WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
    shoulder belt across the torso.

    Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
    The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
    chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

    105

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 106

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Conditions of operation
    If...
    The driver’s safety belt is not
    buckled before the ignition
    switch is turned to the on
    position...
    The driver’s safety belt is
    buckled while the indicator
    light is illuminated and the
    warning chime is sounding...
    The driver’s safety belt is
    buckled before the ignition
    switch is turned to the on
    position...

    Then...
    The safety belt warning light
    illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
    warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
    The safety belt warning light and
    warning chime turn off.

    The safety belt warning light and
    indicator chime remain off.

    Belt-Minderா
    The Belt-Minder௡ feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
    warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
    intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
    light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
    safety belt is unbuckled.
    The Belt-Minder௡ feature uses information from the front passenger
    sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
    therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
    Belt-Minder௡ feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
    warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
    by the front passenger sensing system.
    Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
    either may activate the Belt-Minder௡ feature. The warnings are the same
    for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder௡ warnings have
    expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
    (driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
    Belt-Minder௡ feature.
    Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder௡ warning will not
    expire. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter.

    106

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 107

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    If...
    The driver’s and front
    passenger’s safety belts are
    buckled before the ignition
    switch is turned to the on
    position or less than
    1-2 minutes have elapsed since
    the ignition switch has been
    turned to on...
    The driver’s or front
    passenger’s safety belt is not
    buckled when the vehicle has
    reached at least 3 mph
    (5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
    elapsed since the ignition
    switch has been turned to on...
    The driver’s or front
    passenger’s safety belt becomes
    unbuckled for approximately
    one minute while the vehicle is
    traveling at least 3 mph
    (5 km/h) and more than
    1-2 minutes have elapsed since
    the ignition switch has been
    turned to on...

    Then...
    The Belt-Minder௡ feature will not
    activate.

    The Belt-Minder௡ feature is activated
    - the safety belt warning light
    illuminates and the warning chime
    sounds for six seconds every
    30 seconds, repeating for
    approximately five minutes or until
    the safety belts are buckled.
    The Belt-Minder௡ feature is activated
    - the safety belt warning light
    illuminates and the warning chime
    sounds for six seconds every
    30 seconds, repeating for
    approximately five minutes or until
    the safety belts are buckled.

    107

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 108

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
    (All statistics based on U.S. data):
    Reasons given... Consider...
    “Crashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day. The more we
    events”
    drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events,
    even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously
    injured in a crash during our lifetime.
    “I’m not going
    3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles (40 km)
    far”
    of home.
    “Belts are
    We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If
    uncomfortable”
    you are uncomfortable - try different positions for
    the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which
    should be as upright as possible; this can improve
    comfort.
    “I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. Belt-Minder௡ reminds
    us to take a few seconds to buckle up.
    “Safety belts
    Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
    don’t work”
    death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and
    by 60% in light trucks.
    “Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
    crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
    “Belts wrinkle
    Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than
    my clothes”
    wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
    unbelted.
    “The people I’m Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
    with don’t wear
    often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
    belts”
    Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
    behavior they see.
    “I have an
    Airbags offer greater protection when used with
    airbag”
    safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
    inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
    “I’d rather be
    Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
    thrown clear”
    times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help
    prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.

    108

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 109

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
    latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder௡ chime. To
    do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
    system.
    Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderா feature
    The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder௡ are
    deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
    one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
    terminate the process.
    Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
    deactivation/activation programming procedure.
    Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder௡ features must be
    disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
    same key cycle.
    Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder௡ cannot be disabled.
    Also, if the Belt-Minder௡ has been previously disabled, it will be
    re-enabled after the use of MyKey™. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
    and security chapter.
    The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder௡ features can be
    deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
    Before following the procedure, make sure that:
    • The parking brake is set
    • The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) and in neutral
    (manual transmission)
    • The ignition switch is in the off position
    • The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
    WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
    Belt-Minder௡, this system is designed to improve your chances of
    being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
    leave the Belt-Minder௡ system activated for yourself and others who
    may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
    deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder௡ feature while driving the vehicle.
    1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE
    ENGINE.
    2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately one
    minute).
    109

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 110

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    • Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
    warning light turns off.
    3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
    safety belt nine times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
    state.
    • After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
    seconds.
    4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
    then unbuckle the safety belt.
    • This will disable the Belt-Minder௡ feature for that seating position if it
    is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
    flash one time per second for three seconds.
    • This will enable the Belt-Minder௡ feature for that seating position if it
    is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
    flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
    seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
    light flashing one time per second for three seconds again.
    AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

    The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety
    belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain
    upper body injuries.
    WARNING: Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently, and the
    risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the
    trim covering the airbag module.
    110

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 111

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Important SRS precautions
    The SRS is designed to work with
    the safety belt to help protect the
    driver and right front passenger
    from certain upper body injuries.
    Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
    there is a risk of injury from a
    deploying airbag.

    WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
    should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
    bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
    WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
    should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
    WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
    (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
    (25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
    WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
    deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
    injuries.
    To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
    • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
    pedals comfortably.
    • Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
    WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
    Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
    those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
    causing serious injury.
    111

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 112

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
    airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
    authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    Children and airbags
    Children must always be properly
    restrained. Accident statistics
    suggest that children are safer when
    properly restrained in the rear
    seating positions than in the front
    seating position. Failure to follow
    these instructions may increase the
    risk of injury in a collision.
    WARNING: Airbags can kill
    or injure a child in a child
    seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
    child seat in front of an active
    airbag. If you must use a
    forward-facing child seat in the
    front seat, move the seat all the
    way back.

    How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
    The airbag SRS is designed to
    activate when the vehicle sustains
    longitudinal deceleration sufficient
    to cause the sensors to close an
    electrical circuit that initiates airbag
    inflation. The fact that the airbags
    did not inflate in a collision does not
    mean that something is wrong with
    the system. Rather, it means the
    forces were not of the type
    sufficient to cause activation. Front
    airbags are designed to inflate in
    frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
    rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
    deceleration.
    112

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 113

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    The airbags inflate and deflate
    rapidly upon activation. After airbag
    deployment, it is normal to notice a
    smoke-like, powdery residue or
    smell the burnt propellant. This may
    consist of cornstarch, talcum
    powder (to lubricate the bag) or
    sodium compounds (e.g., baking
    soda) that result from the
    combustion process that inflates the
    airbag. Small amounts of sodium
    hydroxide may be present which
    may irritate the skin and eyes, but
    none of the residue is toxic.
    While the system is designed to help
    reduce serious injuries, contact with
    a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
    hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
    force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
    facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
    are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
    of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
    properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
    maintaining vehicle control.
    WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
    inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
    WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
    function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
    bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
    in a collision.
    The SRS consists of:
    • driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
    airbags).
    • side airbags. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag system later in this
    chapter.
    • side air curtain system. Refer to Side-curtain airbag system later in
    this chapter.
    113

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 114

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    • safety belt pretensioners
    • one or more impact and safing sensors.
    • Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
    system later in this chapter.
    • “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
    Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
    • a readiness light and tone.
    • diagnostic module.
    • and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
    The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
    supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
    sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
    backup power and the airbag ignitors.
    Front passenger sensing system
    The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
    requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
    and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
    airbag under certain conditions.
    The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
    the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
    detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
    front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
    disabled (will not inflate).
    The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
    front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
    • the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
    the front seat,
    • the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
    seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
    • the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
    child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
    instructions,
    • the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
    • a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
    time,
    • a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.
    114

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 115

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Note: When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger
    (seat mounted) side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
    deployment injuries.
    The front passenger sensing system
    uses a Љpassenger airbag offЉ or
    Љpass airbag offЉ indicator which will
    illuminate and stay lit to remind you
    that the front passenger frontal
    airbag is disabled. The indicator
    lamp is located on the center stack area of the instrument panel.
    Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
    the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
    When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
    event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
    indicator lamp will be unlit.
    The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
    inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
    seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
    • When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
    the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
    and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
    disabled.
    • If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
    lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
    vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
    manufacturer’s instructions.
    The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
    the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
    person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
    • When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
    frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
    If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
    Љpassenger airbag offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator lamp is lit, it is
    possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
    • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
    full upright position.
    • Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
    with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
    115

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 116

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    • Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
    about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
    and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
    • If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
    advised to ride in the rear seat.
    Occupant

    Pass Airbag Off
    Indicator Lamp
    Unlit
    Lit

    Empty seat
    Small child in child
    safety seat or booster
    Small child with safety Lit
    belt buckled or
    unbuckled
    Adult
    Unlit

    Passenger Airbag
    Disabled
    Disabled
    Disabled

    Enabled

    WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
    12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
    position.
    After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
    very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
    occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
    seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
    improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
    example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
    leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
    injury during a crash is greatly increased.
    WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
    back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
    and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
    in serious injury or death in a crash.
    Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
    The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
    placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
    passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
    passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ lamp may or may not
    be illuminated according to the table below.
    116

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 117

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Objects

    Pass Airbag Off
    Indicator Lamp
    Unlit

    Passenger Airbag

    Small (i.e. three-ring
    Disabled
    binder, small purse,
    bottled water)
    Medium (i.e. heavy
    Lit
    Disabled
    briefcase, fully packed
    luggage)
    Empty seat, or small
    Lit
    Disabled
    to medium object with
    safety belt buckled
    If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
    incorrect, check for the following:
    • Objects lodged underneath the seat
    • Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
    equipped)
    • Objects hanging off the seat back
    • Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
    • Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
    • Cargo interference with the seat
    • Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
    • Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
    The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
    occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system.
    The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due
    to the conditions described in the list above.
    WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
    Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
    hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
    Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
    the seat and the center console (if equipped).
    Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
    proper airbag Status.
    Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the passenger
    seat sensing system.
    117

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 118

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    In case there is a problem with the
    front passenger sensing system, the
    airbag readiness lamp in the
    instrument cluster will stay lit.
    If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
    The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
    may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
    with the seat.
    If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
    the following steps to remove the obstruction:
    • Pull the vehicle over.
    • Turn the vehicle off.
    • Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
    underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
    • Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
    • Restart the vehicle.
    • Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is
    no longer illuminated
    • If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not
    be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
    DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
    immediately to an authorized dealer.
    If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
    accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
    Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
    Assistance section of this owner’s guide.
    WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
    seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
    system.
    Determining if the system is operational
    The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
    instrument cluster or a backup tone to indicate the condition of the
    system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
    Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
    required.
    118

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 119

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
    • The readiness light (same light
    for front and side airbag system)
    will either flash or stay lit.
    • The readiness light will not
    illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
    • A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
    periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
    If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
    restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
    serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
    collision.
    Seat-mounted side airbag system
    WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
    near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
    seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
    deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
    risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
    WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
    accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
    airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
    WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
    could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
    WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
    airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
    airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
    their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.

    119

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 120

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    How does the side airbag system work?
    The design and development of the
    side airbag system included
    recommended testing procedures
    that were developed by a group of
    automotive safety experts known as
    the Side Airbag Technical Working
    Group. These recommended testing
    procedures help reduce the risk of
    injuries related to the deployment of
    side airbags.
    The side airbag system consists of
    the following:
    • An inflatable bag (airbag) with a
    gas generator concealed behind
    the outboard bolster of the driver
    and front passenger seatbacks.
    • A special seat cover designed to
    allow airbag deployment.
    • The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
    for the front airbags.
    • Two pressure sensors located in the front doors.
    • Two crash sensors located between the “B” and “C” pillars.
    Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
    severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
    The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
    front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
    the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
    the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
    occupants in side impact collisions.
    The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
    deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
    that initiates airbag inflation.
    The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
    something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
    not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
    to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
    near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
    deceleration.
    120

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 121

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
    inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
    WARNING: If the side
    airbag has deployed, the
    airbag will not function again.
    The side airbag system
    (including the seat) must be
    inspected and serviced by an
    authorized dealer. If the airbag
    is not replaced, the unrepaired
    area will increase the risk of injury
    in a collision.

    Side-curtain airbag system
    WARNING: Do not place
    objects or mount equipment
    on or near the headliner at the
    siderail that may come into
    contact with a deploying side air
    curtain. Failure to follow these
    instructions may increase the risk
    of personal injury in the event of a
    collision.

    WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
    near the side air curtain cover.

    WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
    could injure you as it deploys from the seat.

    121

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 122

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the side
    air curtain system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
    headliner on a vehicle containing a side air curtain. See your
    authorized dealer.

    WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
    should always wear their safety belts even when an inflatable
    curtain is provided.

    WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or
    place objects in the deployment zone of the inflatable curtain.

    How does the side air curtain system work?
    The design and development of the
    side air curtain system included
    recommended testing procedures
    that were developed by a group of
    automotive safety experts known as
    the Side Airbag Technical Working
    Group. These recommended testing
    procedures help reduce the risk of
    injuries related to the deployment of
    side airbags (including side air
    curtain systems).
    The side air curtain system consists
    of the following:
    • An inflatable curtain with a gas
    generator concealed behind the
    headliner and above the doors.
    • The headliner will flex to open
    above the side doors to allow air
    curtain deployment.
    • The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
    for the front airbags.
    122

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 123

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    • Two pressure sensors located in the front doors.
    • Two crash sensors located on the rocker panel between the “B” and
    “C” pillars near the floor.
    Side air curtains and side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can
    help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side
    impact collision.
    Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
    the rear seats. The side air curtain will not interfere with children
    restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
    designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
    the side window openings.
    The side air curtains are mounted to the sheet metal above the first and
    second row seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air curtain and
    seat-mounted side airbag on the side affected by the collision will be
    inflated, except that the passenger sensing system will deactivate the
    passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty unbuckled
    passenger seat. The air curtain was designed to inflate between the side
    window area and occupant to further enhance the head protection
    provided to occupants in side impact collisions. The seat-mounted side
    airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to
    further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact
    collisions.
    The side air curtain system SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle
    sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an
    electrical circuit that initiates air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag
    inflation.
    The fact that the side air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag did not
    inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the
    system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to
    cause activation. The side air curtain system is designed to inflate in side
    impact collisions, not roll-over, rear impact, frontal or near-frontal
    collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
    WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
    inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.

    123

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 124

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: If the side air
    curtain has deployed, the
    air curtain will not function
    again. The side air curtain
    system (including the A, B and
    C pillar trim and headliner)
    must be inspected and serviced
    by an authorized dealer. If the
    air curtain is not replaced, the
    unrepaired area will increase the
    risk of injury in a collision.

    Determining if the system is operational
    The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
    indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Warning lights and
    chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
    side airbag is not required.
    A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
    • The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
    flash or stay lit.
    • The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
    turned on.
    • A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
    periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
    If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
    at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
    not function properly in the event of a collision.
    SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
    The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
    horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
    that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy௡) or
    the safety belt pretensioners.
    The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
    taken by the driver or any other person:
    • pressing the hazard control button,
    • or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
    124

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 125

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
    Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
    pretensioners)
    Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
    disposed of by qualified personnel.
    SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
    See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
    restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
    (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
    Important child restraint precautions
    WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
    a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
    Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
    Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
    increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
    WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
    Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
    child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
    organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
    recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
    Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
    child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
    properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
    and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
    internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
    St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
    information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
    local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
    Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
    restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
    and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
    your child.

    125

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 126

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
    Recommended
    Child size, height, weight, or age
    restraint type
    Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
    Use a child safety
    toddlers less (generally age four or younger) seat (sometimes
    called an infant
    carrier, convertible
    seat, or toddler seat).
    Use a belt-positioning
    Small
    Children who have outgrown or no
    booster seat.
    children longer properly fit in a child safety
    seat (generally children who are less
    than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
    tall, are greater than age four (4)
    and less than age twelve (12), and
    between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
    (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
    (45 kg) if recommended by your
    child restraint manufacturer)
    Use a vehicle safety
    Larger
    Children who have outgrown or no
    children longer properly fit in a
    belt having the lap
    belt snug and low
    belt-positioning booster seat
    (generally children who are at least across the hips,
    4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or shoulder belt
    greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb centered across the
    shoulder and chest,
    (45 kg) if recommended by child
    and seatback upright.
    restraint manufacturer)
    • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
    toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
    • Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
    booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
    (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
    provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
    children in your vehicle.
    • When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
    age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
    statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
    the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
    126

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 127

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

    Restraint
    Type

    Rear
    facing
    child seat
    Forward
    facing
    child seat
    Forward
    facing
    child seat

    Use any attachment method as indicated
    below by “X”
    LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
    Safety
    (lower (lower
    belt
    belt and belt
    Child anchors anchors and
    LATCH
    only
    Weight and
    only)
    top
    (lower
    top
    tether anchors
    tether
    anchor and top
    anchor)
    tether
    anchor)
    Up to
    48 lb
    X
    X
    (21 kg)
    Up to
    48 lb
    X
    X
    X
    (21 kg)
    Over
    48 lb
    X
    X
    (21 kg)

    WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
    NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
    If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
    vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
    under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
    children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
    position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
    WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
    warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
    determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
    height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
    instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
    conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
    manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
    inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
    properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.

    127

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 128

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
    while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
    child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
    death.
    WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
    They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
    death in a collision.
    WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
    seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
    sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
    WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
    belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
    the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
    of injury or death in a collision.
    WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
    unattended in your vehicle.
    Transporting children
    Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
    appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
    differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
    recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
    Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
    training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
    the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
    Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
    pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
    properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
    CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
    at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
    Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
    contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
    Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
    1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
    128

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 129

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
    passengers in your vehicle.
    If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
    child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
    restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
    with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
    belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
    different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
    safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
    seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
    SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
    Infant and/or toddler seats
    Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
    child.
    When installing a child safety seat:
    • Review and follow the information
    presented in the Airbag
    supplemental restraint system
    (SRS) section in this chapter.
    • Carefully follow all of the
    manufacturer’s instructions
    included with the safety seat you
    put in your vehicle. If you do not
    install and use the safety seat
    properly, the child may be injured
    in a sudden stop or collision.
    Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
    rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
    forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
    way back.
    Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
    position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
    restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
    largest child in the front seat.
    Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
    belts
    Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
    Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
    129

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 130

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
    restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
    largest child in the front seat.
    When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
    • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
    • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
    and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
    buckle.
    • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
    seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
    to prevent accidental unbuckling.
    • Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
    • Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5
    below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
    WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
    and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
    access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
    anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
    injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
    to be properly restrained.
    Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
    combination lap/shoulder belts:
    Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
    the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
    1. Position the child safety seat in a
    seat with a combination lap and
    shoulder belt.

    130

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 131

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
    and then grasp the shoulder belt
    and lap belt together.

    3. While holding the shoulder and
    lap belt portions together, route the
    tongue through the child seat
    according to the child seat
    manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
    the belt webbing is not twisted.

    4. Insert the belt tongue into the
    proper buckle (the buckle closest to
    the direction the tongue is coming
    from) for that seating position until
    you hear a snap and feel the latch
    engage. Make sure the tongue is
    latched securely by pulling on it.

    131

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 132

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    5. To put the retractor in the
    automatic locking mode, grasp the
    shoulder portion of the belt and pull
    downward until all of the belt is
    pulled out.
    Note: The automatic locking mode
    is available on the front passenger
    and rear outboard seats only. The
    rear center seating position has a
    cinch tongue. Refer to Installing
    child safety seats in cinch tongue
    combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions (rear center
    position only) in this chapter.
    6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
    retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
    7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
    in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
    out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
    and 6.
    8. Remove remaining slack from the
    belt. Force the seat down with extra
    weight, e.g., by pressing down or
    kneeling on the child restraint while
    pulling up on the shoulder belt in
    order to force slack from the belt.
    This is necessary to remove the
    remaining slack that will exist once
    the additional weight of the child is
    added to the child restraint. It also
    helps to achieve the proper
    snugness of the child seat to the
    vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
    towards the buckle will additionally
    help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
    9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
    Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.

    132

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 133

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    10. Before placing the child in the
    seat, forcibly move the seat forward
    and back to make sure the seat is
    securely held in place. To check
    this, grab the seat at the belt path
    and attempt to move it side to side
    and forward and back. There should
    be no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of
    movement for proper installation.
    11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
    Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
    installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
    referral to a CPST.
    Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and
    shoulder belt seating positions (rear center position only)
    The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
    lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder
    belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt.
    Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
    the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
    1. Position the child safety seat in a
    seat with a combination lap and
    shoulder belt.

    WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If
    you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
    seat all the way back.
    WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
    front of an active airbag.
    133

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 134

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.

    3. While holding both shoulder and
    lap portions next to the tongue,
    route the tongue and webbing
    through the child seat according to
    the child seat manufacturer’s
    instructions. Be sure that the belt
    webbing is not twisted.

    4. Insert the belt tongue into the
    proper buckle for that seating
    positions until you hear a snap and
    feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
    securely latched to the buckle by
    pulling on the tongue.

    134

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 135

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    5. Remove remaining slack from the
    belt. Force the seat down with extra
    weight, e.g., by pressing down or
    kneeling on the child restraint while
    pulling up on the shoulder belt in
    order to force slack from the belt.
    This is necessary to remove the
    remaining slack that will exist once
    the additional weight of the child is
    added to the child restraint. It also
    helps to achieve the proper
    snugness of the child seat to the
    vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
    towards the buckle will additionally
    help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
    6. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
    Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
    7. Before placing the child in the
    seat, forcibly move the seat forward
    and back to make sure the seat is
    securely held in place. To check
    this, grab the seat at the belt path
    and attempt to move it side to side
    and forward and back. There should
    be no more than one inch (2.5 cm)
    of movement for proper installation.
    8. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
    Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
    installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
    referral to a CPST.
    Attaching child safety seats with Lower Anchor and Tethers for
    CHildren (LATCH) attachments
    The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
    lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
    (called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
    that seating position.
    LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
    attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
    135

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 136

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
    method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
    however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
    forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
    the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
    with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
    child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
    seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
    restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
    Your vehicle has LATCH lower
    anchors for child seat installation at
    the seating positions marked with
    the child seat symbol.

    The LATCH anchors are located at
    the rear section of the rear seat
    between the cushion and seatback.
    Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
    instructions to properly install a
    child seat with LATCH attachments.

    Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
    Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this
    chapter.
    Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
    shown.
    WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
    anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
    two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
    injury or death.

    136

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 137

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
    and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
    access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
    anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
    injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
    to be properly restrained.
    Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
    (center seating use)
    The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
    450 mm (18 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
    anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid
    LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
    LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
    only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
    manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
    Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
    attached to that anchor.
    WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
    is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
    lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
    manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
    least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
    Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
    attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
    child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
    the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
    for a proper installation.
    If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
    injured in a crash greatly increases.
    Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
    child safety seats
    When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
    anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
    Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
    to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
    in this chapter.
    137

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 138

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
    Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
    extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
    point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
    accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
    child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
    longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
    the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
    The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
    anchors located behind the seats as described below.
    The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked
    with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
    The tether strap anchors in your
    vehicle are in the following positions
    (shown from top view):

    Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
    The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
    than the correct tether anchor.
    Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
    the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
    tether strap.
    If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
    the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
    when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
    lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
    vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
    Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
    anchors:
    1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
    For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
    the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
    the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
    138

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 139

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    2. Locate the correct anchor for the
    selected seating position.

    3. Open the tether anchor cover.

    4. Clip the tether strap to the
    anchor as shown.
    If the tether strap is clipped
    incorrectly, the child safety seat may
    not be retained properly in the
    event of a collision.

    5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
    manufacturer’s instructions.
    If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
    injured in a collision greatly increases.
    If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
    child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
    its use.
    Child booster seats
    The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
    the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
    convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
    around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
    for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
    Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
    remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
    secured to the vehicle.
    139

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 140

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
    who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
    belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
    could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
    both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
    safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
    booster.
    Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
    better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
    and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
    minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
    better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
    shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
    few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
    the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
    When children should use booster seats
    Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
    toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
    lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
    height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
    age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
    100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
    Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
    booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
    (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
    Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
    questions when seated without a booster seat:
    • Can the child sit all the way back
    against the vehicle seat back with
    knees bent comfortably at the
    edge of the seat cushion?
    • Can the child sit without
    slouching?
    • Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
    • Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
    • Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
    140

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 141

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Types of booster seats
    There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
    and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
    lap/shoulder belt.
    • Backless booster seats
    If your backless booster seat has a
    removable shield, remove the
    shield. If a vehicle seating position
    has a low seat back or no head
    restraint, a backless booster seat
    may place your child’s head (as
    measured at the tops of the ears)
    above the top of the seat. In this
    case, move the backless booster
    to another seating position with a
    higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
    using a high back booster seat.
    • High back booster seats
    If, with a backless booster seat,
    you cannot find a seating position
    that adequately supports your
    child’s head, a high back booster
    seat would be a better choice.

    141

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 142

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
    keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
    stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
    rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
    the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
    and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
    also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
    hips.

    If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
    sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
    condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
    seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
    The importance of shoulder belts
    Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
    head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
    never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
    booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
    Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
    stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
    142

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 143

    Seating and Safety Restraints
    Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
    WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
    belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
    the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
    of injury or death in a collision.
    Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
    Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
    to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
    vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
    or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
    retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
    assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
    equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
    seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
    inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
    instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
    specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
    safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
    replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
    finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
    properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
    use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
    damage or improper operation is noted.
    For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
    chapter.
    WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
    safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
    conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
    collision.

    143

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 144

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
    Tire Quality Grades apply to new
    pneumatic passenger car tires. The
    Quality grades can be found where
    applicable on the tire sidewall
    between tread shoulder and
    maximum section width. For
    example:
    • Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
    These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
    States Department of Transportation has set.
    Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
    not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
    temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
    nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
    defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
    U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
    Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
    the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
    has written it.
    Treadwear
    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
    the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
    government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
    and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
    graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
    conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
    norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
    differences in road characteristics and climate.
    Traction AA A B C
    The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
    grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
    under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
    asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
    performance.
    144

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 145

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
    straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
    acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
    Temperature A B C
    The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
    tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
    when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
    test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
    to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
    sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
    which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
    Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
    performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
    law.
    WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
    for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
    speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
    combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
    TIRES
    Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
    must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
    Glossary of tire terminology
    • Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
    recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
    can carry.
    • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
    each tire providing information about the tire brand and
    manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
    to as DOT code.
    • Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
    • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
    maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
    the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
    load carrying capability.
    • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
    heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
    145

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 146

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
    the tire’s load carrying capability.
    • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
    • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
    • Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
    been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
    prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
    • Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
    on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
    the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
    • B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
    front door.
    • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
    • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
    • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
    contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
    • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
    upon which the tire beads are seated.
    INFLATING YOUR TIRES
    Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
    inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
    without appearing flat.
    Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
    others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
    required.
    At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
    the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
    all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
    You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
    service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
    digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
    pressure gauge.
    Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
    performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
    uneven treadwear patterns.
    146

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 147

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
    failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
    or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased
    risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
    resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
    also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
    vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
    pressure and not appear to be flat!
    Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
    even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
    on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
    the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
    on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
    pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
    adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
    Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
    maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
    maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
    higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
    which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
    Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
    The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
    recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
    Tire Label.
    When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
    change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
    of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
    frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
    on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
    To check the pressure in your tire(s):
    1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
    even a mile.
    If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
    than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
    hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
    recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
    inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
    Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
    and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
    147

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 148

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
    pressure inside to go up as you drive.
    2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
    gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
    3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
    Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
    the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
    4. Replace the valve cap.
    5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
    Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
    other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
    tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
    60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see the
    Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
    and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
    shown on the Tire Label.
    6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
    objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
    leak.
    7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
    TIRE CARE
    Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
    Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
    remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
    tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
    that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
    the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
    other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
    suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
    repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
    signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
    to blow out or fail.

    148

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 149

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
    abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
    replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
    Tire wear
    When the tread is worn down to
    1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
    be replaced to help prevent your
    vehicle from skidding and
    hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
    indicators, or “wear bars”, which
    look like narrow strips of smooth
    rubber across the tread will appear
    on the tire when the tread is worn
    down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
    When the tire tread wears down to
    the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
    replaced.
    Damage
    Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
    bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
    separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
    have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
    during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
    recommended.
    WARNING: Age
    Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
    weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
    inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
    In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
    wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
    conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
    replaced more frequently.
    You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
    after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

    149

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 150

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
    Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
    place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
    information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
    the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
    safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
    This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
    federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
    designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
    code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
    built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
    2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
    week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
    traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
    requires a recall.
    Tire replacement requirements
    Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
    handling capability.
    WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
    same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
    versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
    provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
    on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
    which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
    information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
    authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
    recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
    vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
    control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
    of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
    suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
    have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
    dealer as soon as possible.

    150

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 151

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
    should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
    sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
    listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
    indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
    When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (138 kPa)
    greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
    precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
    1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
    2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
    3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
    assembly.
    4. Use both eye and ear protection.
    For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (138 kPa) greater than the
    maximum pressure, an authorized dealer or other tire service
    professional should do the mounting.
    Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
    inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
    wheel assembly.
    Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
    tires are replaced on your vehicle.
    It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
    replaced as a pair.
    The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be
    used in aftermarket wheels.
    The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
    may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system (if
    equipped).
    If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
    replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
    component of the TPMS may be damaged (if equipped).
    Safety practices
    Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
    • Observe posted speed limits
    • Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
    • Avoid potholes and objects on the road
    151

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 152

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    • Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
    WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
    not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
    cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
    seconds.
    WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
    The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
    Highway hazards
    No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
    may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
    closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
    your safety is more important.
    If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
    suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
    speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
    inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
    deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
    you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
    facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
    Tire and wheel alignment
    A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
    vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
    vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
    out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
    periodically.
    Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
    treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
    Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
    suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
    The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
    wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
    Tire rotation
    Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
    Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter) will help your tires wear more
    evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
    152

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 153

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    • Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
    (front tires at top of diagram)

    Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
    Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
    for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
    problem involved before tire rotation.
    Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
    dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
    different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
    you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
    only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
    Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
    and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
    INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
    Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
    place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
    information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
    the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
    safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
    153

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 154

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Information on “P” type tires
    P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
    tire size, load index and speed
    rating. The definitions of these
    items are listed below. (Note that
    the tire size, load index and speed
    rating for your vehicle may be
    different from this example.)
    1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
    the Tire and Rim Association
    (T&RA), that may be used for
    service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
    light trucks.
    Note: If your tire size does not
    begin with a letter this may mean it
    is designated by either ETRTO
    (European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
    Manufacturing Association).
    2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
    sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
    wider the tire.
    3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
    width.
    4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
    5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
    wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
    diameter.
    6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
    much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
    Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
    Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
    required by federal law.
    7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
    speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
    time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
    on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
    pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
    in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
    (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
    154

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 155

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
    required by federal law.
    Letter rating
    Speed rating - mph (km/h)
    M
    81 mph (130 km/h)
    N
    87 mph (140 km/h)
    Q
    99 mph (159 km/h)
    R
    106 mph (171 km/h)
    S
    112 mph (180 km/h)
    T
    118 mph (190 km/h)
    U
    124 mph (200 km/h)
    H
    130 mph (210 km/h)
    V
    149 mph (240 km/h)
    W
    168 mph (270 km/h)
    Y
    186 mph (299 km/h)
    Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
    (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
    those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
    manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
    8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
    letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
    next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
    manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
    numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
    the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
    go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
    numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
    information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
    9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
    AT: All Terrain, or
    AS: All Season.
    10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
    plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
    sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
    tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

    155

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 156

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
    pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
    Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
    driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
    12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
    • Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
    wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
    specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
    would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
    course as a tire graded 100.
    • Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
    and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
    as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
    surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
    traction performance.
    • Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
    representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
    ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
    specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
    13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
    manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
    which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
    normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
    pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
    Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
    driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
    the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
    The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
    as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

    156

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 157

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
    tires
    “LT” type tires have some additional
    information beyond those of “P”
    type tires; these differences are
    described below.
    Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
    apply to this type of tire.
    1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
    the Tire and Rim Association
    (T&RA), that is intended for service
    on light trucks.
    2. Load Range/Load Inflation
    Limits: Indicates the tire’s
    load-carrying capabilities and its
    inflation limits.
    3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
    maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
    as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
    4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
    maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
    defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

    157

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 158

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Information on “T” type tires
    “T” type tires have some additional
    information beyond those of “P”
    type tires; these differences are
    described below:
    T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
    size.
    Note: The temporary tire size for
    your vehicle may be different from
    this example. Tire Quality Grades do
    not apply to this type of tire.
    1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
    designated by the Tire and Rim
    Association (T&RA), that is
    intended for temporary service on
    cars, SUVs, minivans and light
    trucks.
    2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
    of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
    the larger the number, the wider the tire.
    3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
    width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
    4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
    R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
    5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
    wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
    diameter.
    Location of the tire label
    You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
    and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
    the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
    Vehicle loading section.

    158

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 159

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
    Each tire, including the spare (if
    provided), should be checked
    monthly when cold and inflated to
    the inflation pressure recommended
    by the vehicle manufacturer on the
    vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
    of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
    inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
    pressure for those tires.)
    As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
    pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
    telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
    Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
    stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
    proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
    tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
    fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
    and stopping ability.
    Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
    maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
    pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
    illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
    Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
    to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
    malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
    When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
    approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
    This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
    the malfunction exists.
    When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
    able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
    may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
    replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
    TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
    telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
    ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
    TPMS to continue to function properly.
    The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
    rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
    159

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 160

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
    interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
    including interference that may cause undesired operation.
    WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
    substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
    should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
    see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
    your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
    vehicle rollover and personal injury.
    Changing tires with TPMS
    Each road tire is equipped with
    a tire pressure sensor located
    inside the tire/wheel cavity. The
    pressure sensor is attached to
    the valve stem. The pressure
    sensor is covered by the tire and
    is not visible unless the tire is
    removed. Care must be taken
    when changing the tire to avoid
    damaging the sensor. It is
    recommended that you always have
    your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
    The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
    an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
    Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
    The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
    tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
    pressure warning lamp will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
    low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need
    to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if
    the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
    needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
    information.
    When your temporary spare tire is installed
    When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
    spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
    that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
    your vehicle.
    160

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 161

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system,
    have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
    vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
    in this section.
    When you believe your system is not operating properly
    The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
    when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
    no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
    following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring
    system:
    Low tire
    pressure
    warning light
    Solid warning
    light

    Possible
    cause

    Customer action required

    Tire(s)
    1. Check your tire pressure to ensure
    under-inflated tires are properly inflated; refer to
    Inflating your tires in this chapter.
    2. After inflating your tires to the
    manufacturer’s recommended
    inflation pressure as shown on the
    Tire Label (located on the edge of
    driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
    vehicle must be driven for at least
    two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
    before the light will turn off.
    Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use.
    use
    Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
    and reinstall it on the vehicle to
    restore system functionality. For a
    description on how the system
    functions, refer to When your
    temporary spare tire is installed in
    this section.
    TPMS
    If your tires are properly inflated and
    malfunction
    your spare tire is not in use and the
    light remains on, contact your
    authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    161

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 162

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Low tire
    pressure
    warning light
    Flashing warning
    light

    Possible
    cause

    Customer action required

    Spare tire in
    use

    Your temporary spare tire is in use.
    Repair the damaged road wheel and
    re-mount it on the vehicle to restore
    system functionality. For a
    description of how the system
    functions under these conditions,
    refer to When your temporary
    spare tire is installed in this section.
    If your tires are properly inflated and
    your spare tire is not in use and the
    TPMS warning light still flashes,
    contact your authorized dealer as
    soon as possible.

    TPMS
    malfunction

    When inflating your tires
    When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
    garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
    immediately to the air added to your tires.
    It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
    light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
    inflation pressure.
    How temperature affects your tire pressure
    The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
    each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
    passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
    (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
    over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
    daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
    (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
    pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
    than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
    for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually
    check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires are flat,
    repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
    under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where
    air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended
    inflation pressure.
    162

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 163

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
    WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
    rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
    wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
    performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
    loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
    Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
    cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
    failure.
    The original equipment tires on your vehicle have an all-weather tread
    design to provide traction, handling and braking performance in
    year-round driving. You may install snow tires for improved traction
    when driving in areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving
    conditions.
    If you choose to install snow tires on your vehicle, they must be the
    same size, construction, and load range as the original tires listed on the
    tire placard, and they must be installed on all four wheels. Mixing tires of
    different size or construction on your vehicle can adversely affect your
    vehicle’s handling and braking, and may lead to loss of vehicle control.
    WARNING: Do not use snow chains or cables on this vehicle as
    they may cause damage to your vehicle which may lead to loss
    of vehicle control.
    VEHICLE LOADING
    This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle to keep
    your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly
    loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design
    performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the
    following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings from the
    vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
    Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
    fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
    optional equipment.
    Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
    picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
    equipment.
    163

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 164

    Tires, Wheels and Loading

    Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
    vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
    on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
    (vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
    Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
    CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
    maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
    payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
    or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
    vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
    payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
    WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
    be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
    available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
    carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
    do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
    improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
    control and vehicle rollover.

    164

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 165

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Example only:

    Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
    including cargo and optional equipment.
    GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
    (front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

    165

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 166

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
    weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
    numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
    located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
    load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

    GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
    passengers.
    GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
    weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
    passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
    Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
    edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.

    166

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 167

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    • Example only:

    WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
    vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
    handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
    damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
    injury.
    WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
    the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
    167

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 168

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
    carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
    lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
    with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
    and GAWR limitations.
    WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
    result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
    Steps for determining the correct load limit:
    1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
    should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
    2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
    be riding in your vehicle.
    3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
    kg or XXX lbs.
    4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
    load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
    there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
    available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
    650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
    5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
    the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
    luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
    The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
    amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
    • Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
    luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
    capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
    four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
    approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
    (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
    enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
    your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
    99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
    • A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
    luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
    cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
    168

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 169

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
    the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
    12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
    to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
    weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
    x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
    cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
    calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
    240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
    the load calculation would be:
    1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
    the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
    metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
    45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
    The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
    vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
    Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
    Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
    TRAILER TOWING
    WARNING: Never tow a trailer with this vehicle. Your vehicle is
    not equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through
    an authorized dealer.
    RECREATIONAL TOWING
    Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
    An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
    a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
    transmission is not damaged.
    Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
    prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
    Controls chapter for more information.

    169

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 170

    Tires, Wheels and Loading
    Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles equipped with a manual
    transmission: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission,
    shifting the transmission into neutral permits “flat-towing” (all wheels on
    the ground) for pulling behind a motorhome.
    Before you tow your vehicle:
    • Release the parking brake.
    • Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
    • Turn the key in the ignition to the off position.
    • The maximum recommended speed is 70 mph (113 km/h).
    • The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.
    • The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
    damage is done to the internal transmission components.
    In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions provided
    by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing equipment, if provided.
    In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
    towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
    Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles equipped with an automatic
    transmission: Do not tow the vehicle with the front drive wheels on the
    ground. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with the front drive
    wheels on a dolly or with all four (4) wheels off the ground on a
    car-hauling trailer.
    In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
    towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

    170

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 171

    Driving
    STARTING
    Positions of the ignition
    1. Off — locks the steering wheel,
    automatic transmission gearshift
    lever and allows key removal. This
    position also shuts the engine and
    all electrical accessories off.
    2. Accessory—allows the electrical
    accessories such as the radio to
    operate while the engine is not
    running.
    3. On— all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
    position when driving.
    4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
    starts.
    Preparing to start your vehicle
    Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
    This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
    requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
    noise.
    When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
    or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
    starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
    Starting the engine in this chapter.
    WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
    very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
    creating the risk of fire or other damage.
    WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
    or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
    engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
    WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
    other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
    the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
    exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
    171

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 172

    Driving
    WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
    your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
    smell exhaust fumes.
    Important safety precautions
    When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
    the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
    checked.
    Before starting the vehicle:
    1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
    information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
    and Safety Restraints chapter.
    2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
    If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
    • Make sure the parking brake is
    set.

    172

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 173

    Driving
    • Make sure the gearshift is in P
    (Park).

    If starting a vehicle with a manual
    transmission:
    • Make sure the parking brake is
    set.
    • Press the clutch pedal to the
    floor.

    3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
    turning the key to 4 (start).

    Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
    chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
    regarding the warning lights.
    173

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 174

    Driving
    Starting the engine
    1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
    turning the key to 4 (start).
    2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
    release the key as soon as the
    engine begins cranking. Your vehicle
    has a computer assisted cranking
    system that assists in starting the
    engine. After releasing the key from
    the 4 (start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to
    10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
    Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off
    position.
    3. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
    brake, shift into gear and drive.
    Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off
    position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again. If the engine still fails to
    start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again, keeping the
    accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
    cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
    in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
    Guarding against exhaust fumes
    Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
    its dangerous effects.
    WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
    your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
    smell exhaust fumes.
    Important ventilating information
    If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
    time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
    air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
    ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
    An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
    and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
    is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
    174

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 175

    Driving
    which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
    the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
    source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
    temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
    WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
    could result in property damage or physical injury.
    WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
    your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
    (cheater) adapters.
    Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
    proper and safe operation:
    • For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
    certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
    Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
    outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
    with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
    outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
    • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
    • Use as short an extension cord as possible.
    • Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
    which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
    the outlet without stretching.
    • Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
    patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
    temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
    extension cords over a period of time.
    • To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
    ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
    Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
    condition before use.
    • Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug/engine
    block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
    to prevent possible shock or fire.
    • Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
    all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
    similar items.
    175

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 176

    Driving
    • Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
    are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
    become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
    to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
    has been operating for approximately a half hour.
    • Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
    tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
    How to use the engine block heater
    Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
    them, use a dry cloth.
    Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
    heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your
    factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;
    however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three
    hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will
    not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional
    electricity.
    Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
    vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
    prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
    BRAKES
    Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
    or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
    and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
    continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
    vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
    Refer to Warning lights and
    !
    P
    chimes in the Instrument Cluster
    chapter for information on the brake
    BRAKE
    system warning light.
    Under normal operating conditions, brake dust may accumulate on the
    wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not
    contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with
    emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations
    can lead to more dust than in the past. Brake dust can be cleaned by
    weekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can
    be removed with Motorcraft௡ Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A).
    176

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 177

    Driving
    Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
    Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
    system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
    keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
    brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
    brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
    done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
    characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
    Using ABS
    When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
    pedal. Do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
    effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
    distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
    steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
    the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
    ABS warning lamp
    The ABS lamp in the instrument
    cluster momentarily illuminates
    ABS
    when the ignition is turned on. If
    the light does not illuminate during
    start up, remains on or flashes, the
    ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
    Even when the ABS is disabled,
    !
    P
    normal braking is still effective. (If
    your BRAKE warning lamp
    BRAKE
    illuminates with the parking brake
    released, have your brake system
    serviced immediately.)

    177

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 178

    Driving
    Parking brake
    To set the parking brake (1), pull
    the parking brake handle up as far
    as possible.

    The BRAKE warning lamp will
    illuminate and will remain
    illuminated until the parking brake
    is released.

    !
    P
    BRAKE

    To release, press and hold the button (2), pull the handle up slightly,
    then push the handle down.
    WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
    that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
    transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
    WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
    warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
    working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    ADVANCETRACா STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
    Your vehicle may be equipped with the AdvanceTrac௡ system. The
    AdvanceTrac௡ system provides the following stability enhancement
    features for certain driving situations:
    • Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
    drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
    • Electronic Stability Control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
    or lateral slides

    178

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 179

    Driving
    WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
    aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
    construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
    characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
    of the AdvanceTrac௡ system. In addition, installing any stereo
    loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac௡
    system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
    from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
    to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac௡ sensors.
    Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac௡ system could lead to
    an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
    injury and death.
    WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
    defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
    vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
    driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
    vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
    Activation of the AdvanceTrac௡ system is an indication that at least
    some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
    could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially
    resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
    and death. If your AdvanceTrac௡ system activates, SLOW DOWN.
    WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
    AdvanceTrac௡ system, the stability control light will illuminate
    steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac௡ system is not manually disabled
    (press the stability control button located on the center of the
    instrument panel). If the stability control light still illuminates steadily,
    have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
    The AdvanceTrac௡ system automatically enables each time the engine is
    started. All features of the AdvanceTrac௡ system (TCS and ESC) are
    active and monitor the vehicle from start-up. However, the system will
    only intervene if the driving situation requires it.

    179

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 180

    Driving
    The AdvanceTrac௡ system includes
    a stability control button on the
    center of the instrument panel, and
    a stability control light in the
    instrument cluster. The stability
    control light in the instrument
    cluster will illuminate temporarily during start-up as part of a normal
    system self-check, or during driving if a driving situation causes the
    AdvanceTrac௡ system to operate. If the stability control light illuminates
    steadily, verify that the AdvanceTrac௡ system is not manually disabled by
    pressing the stability control button located on the center stack of the
    instrument panel. If the stability control light remains steadily
    illuminated, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
    immediately. If equipped with a message center, the vehicle will also
    indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac௡ system.
    Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
    and Security chapter for more information.
    When AdvanceTrac௡ performs a normal system self-check, some drivers
    may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a rumble, grunting, or
    grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
    When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac௡ you may experience
    the following:
    • A slight deceleration of the vehicle
    • The stability control light will flash.
    • A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
    • If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
    brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
    may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
    this severe condition.
    • The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
    Traction control system (TCS)
    Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
    traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
    road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
    Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
    separately or in tandem, engine traction control and brake traction
    control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
    momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
    180

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 181

    Driving
    wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
    slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
    During TCS events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster
    will flash.
    If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking
    portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the
    brakes to cool down. In this situation, TCS will use only engine power
    reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
    When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain all features.
    Anti-lock braking, and ESC are not affected by this condition and will
    continue to function during the cool-down period.
    The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
    deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off traction control
    section below.
    Electronic stability control (ESC)
    Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
    stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
    or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
    one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
    power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
    laterally.
    During ESC events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster
    will flash.
    Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
    include but are not limited to:
    • Taking a turn too fast
    • Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
    • Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
    • Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
    • Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
    versa
    • Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
    • Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
    towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
    Switching off traction control
    If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
    power, switching off the TCS feature of the AdvanceTrac௡ system may
    181

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 182

    Driving
    be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This will restore
    full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle. To
    switch off the TCS press the stability control button. Full features of the
    AdvanceTrac௡ system can be restored by pressing the stability control
    button again or by turning off and restarting the engine.
    If you switch off the TCS, the stability control light will illuminate
    steadily. Pressing the AdvanceTrac௡ button again will turn off the
    stability control light.
    In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
    control features will continue to function; however, ESC is disabled.

    Button functions
    Default at start-up
    Button pressed
    momentarily
    Button pressed
    again after
    deactivation

    AdvanceTrac௡ Features
    Stability
    ESC
    control light
    Illuminated
    during bulb
    Enabled
    check

    TCS
    Enabled

    Illuminated solid

    Enabled

    Disabled

    Not illuminated

    Enabled

    Enabled

    STEERING
    To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
    • Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
    stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
    • Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
    (below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
    • Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
    for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
    authorized dealer.
    • Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
    steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
    seeking service by your authorized dealer.
    • Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
    the reservoir.
    If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
    off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
    182

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 183

    Driving
    If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
    • An improperly inflated tire
    • Uneven tire wear
    • Loose or worn suspension components
    • Loose or worn steering components
    • Improper steering alignment
    A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
    seem to wander/pull.
    BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
    This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
    the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
    in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
    If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
    the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
    blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
    Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
    If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
    following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
    (Park):
    1. Apply the parking brake, turn
    ignition key to off, then remove the
    key.
    2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
    tool), remove the protective cover
    to the interlock release access hole
    on the console.
    3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar
    tool) into the access hole and press
    downward while pulling the
    gearshift lever out of the P (Park)
    position and into the N (Neutral)
    position.
    4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
    protective cover.
    5. Start the vehicle and release the parking brake.
    183

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 184

    Driving
    See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure
    is used.
    WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
    brake lamps are working.
    WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
    the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
    position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
    WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
    warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
    working properly. See your authorized dealer.
    AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
    Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
    transmission
    This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy.
    Adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission
    operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been
    disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need
    to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset
    your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected.
    The adaptive transmission shift strategy allows the transmission to
    relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take
    several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning
    process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process,
    normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.

    184

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 185

    Driving
    P (Park)
    This position locks the transmission
    and prevents the front wheels from
    turning.
    To put your vehicle in gear:
    1. Start the engine
    2. Press the brake pedal
    3. Move the gearshift lever into the
    desired gear
    To put your vehicle in P (Park):
    1. Come to a complete stop
    2. Move the gearshift lever and
    securely latch it in P (Park)
    WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
    the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
    position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
    R (Reverse)
    With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
    Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
    (Reverse).
    N (Neutral)
    With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
    free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
    D (Drive) with Overdrive
    The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
    operates in gears one through four.

    185

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 186

    Driving
    D (Drive) without Overdrive
    Overdrive can be deactivated by
    pressing the transmission control
    switch on the side of the gearshift
    lever.
    • This position allows for all
    forward gears (1–3) except
    overdrive.
    • Provides engine braking.
    • Use when driving conditions
    cause excessive shifting from O/D
    to other gears. Examples: hilly
    terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing
    and when engine braking is
    required.
    • O/D OFF lamp in the instrument
    O/D
    cluster is illuminated.
    OFF
    • To return to O/D (overdrive
    mode), press the transmission
    control switch. The O/D OFF lamp in the instrument cluster will not
    be illuminated.
    • O/D (overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
    off.
    L (Low)
    This position:
    • Provides increased engine braking during downhill/mountain driving.
    • Provides extended shift scheduling, allowing both upshifts and
    downshifts, at a higher overall RPM to provide optimum engine
    braking.
    • Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions
    and results in lower fuel economy.

    186

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 187

    Driving
    If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
    If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
    shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
    steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
    Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
    temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
    Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
    transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
    MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
    Using the clutch
    Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents
    cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
    To start the vehicle:
    1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
    2. Press the clutch pedal to the
    floor, then put the gearshift lever in
    the neutral position.
    3. Start the engine.
    4. Press the brake pedal and move
    the gearshift lever to the desired
    gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
    5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while
    slowly pressing on the accelerator.
    During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor.
    Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with
    the full extension of the clutch pedal.
    Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
    increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission
    components or damage the transmission.
    Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
    clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a
    hill. These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and
    could nullify a clutch warranty claim.

    187

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 188

    Driving
    Recommended shift speeds
    Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving
    faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). This will damage the clutch.
    Upshift according to the following chart:
    Recommended upshifts (for best fuel economy) when
    accelerating
    5-speed manual transmission
    Shift from:
    1-2
    14 mph (23 km/h)
    2-3
    24 mph (39 km/h)
    3-4
    32 mph (51 km/h)
    4-5
    44 mph (71 km/h)
    Reverse
    Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift
    into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
    Hold the clutch pedal down and move the gearshift lever into the neutral
    position. Wait at least three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
    Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving
    it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
    This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally
    being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Fifth).
    If R (Reverse) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and
    return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal for
    a moment, then press it down and shift to R (Reverse) again.
    Parking your vehicle
    1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
    2. Fully apply the parking brake, hold the clutch pedal down, then shift
    into 1 (First).
    3. Turn the ignition off.
    WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
    unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
    parking brake fully.
    Removing the key
    Turn the ignition to position 1 (off) and remove the key.
    188

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 189

    Driving
    DRIVING THROUGH WATER
    If driving through deep or standing
    water is unavoidable, proceed very
    slowly especially when the depth is
    not known. Never drive through
    water that is higher than the bottom
    of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
    bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
    When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
    Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
    engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
    the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
    transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
    Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
    vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
    Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

    189

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 190

    Roadside Emergencies
    ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
    Getting roadside assistance
    To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
    Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
    program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
    is available:
    • 24-hours, seven days a week
    • for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
    included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
    Roadside assistance will cover:
    • a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
    supplied with a tire inflation kit)
    • battery jump start
    • lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
    responsibility)
    • fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
    state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
    gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
    delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
    12-month period.
    • winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
    county maintained road, no recoveries.
    • towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
    dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
    nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
    authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
    location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
    excess of 35 miles (56 km).
    Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
    requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
    but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
    roadside services.

    190

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 191

    Roadside Emergencies
    Canadian customers refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our
    website at www.ford.ca for information on:
    Using roadside assistance
    Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
    wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
    Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
    found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment.
    U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
    Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
    Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
    1-800-665-2006.
    If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
    Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
    dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
    information, U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call
    1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original
    receipts.
    Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
    1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
    HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
    The hazard flasher is located on the
    steering column, just behind the
    steering wheel. The hazard flashers
    will operate when the ignition is in
    any position or if the key is not in
    the ignition.
    Press the flasher control and all
    front and rear direction signals will
    flash. Press the flasher control again
    to turn them off. Use it when your
    vehicle is disabled and is creating a
    safety hazard for other motorists.
    Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.

    191

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 192

    Roadside Emergencies
    FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
    This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
    when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
    After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
    may have been activated.
    This switch is located in the front
    passenger’s footwell, behind the kick
    panel access cover.
    To reset the switch:
    1. Turn the ignition off.
    2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
    3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
    switch by pressing in on the reset
    button.
    4. Turn the ignition to the on position.
    5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to off.
    6. Make another check for leaks.
    FUSES AND RELAYS
    Fuses
    If electrical components in the
    vehicle are not working, a fuse may
    have blown. Blown fuses are
    identified by a broken wire within
    the fuse. Check the appropriate
    fuses before replacing any electrical
    components.

    15

    Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
    rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
    damage and could start a fire.

    192

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 193

    Roadside Emergencies
    Standard fuse amperage rating and color
    COLOR
    Fuse
    rating

    Mini
    fuses

    Standard
    fuses

    Maxi
    fuses

    2A
    3A
    4A
    5A
    7.5A
    10A
    15A
    20A
    25A
    30A
    40A
    50A
    60A
    70A
    80A

    Grey
    Violet
    Pink
    Tan
    Brown
    Red
    Blue
    Yellow
    Natural
    Green






    Grey
    Violet
    Pink
    Tan
    Brown
    Red
    Blue
    Yellow
    Natural
    Green













    Yellow

    Green
    Orange
    Red
    Blue
    Tan
    Natural

    Cartridge
    Fuse link
    maxi
    cartridge
    fuses














    Blue
    Blue


    Pink
    Pink
    Green
    Green
    Red
    Red
    Yellow
    Yellow

    Brown
    Black
    Black

    Passenger compartment fuse panel
    The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
    the brake pedal. Remove the fuse panel cover to gain access to the fuses.
    To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
    cover.

    193

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 194

    Roadside Emergencies

    The fuses are coded as follows.
    Fuse/Relay
    Location
    1
    2

    Fuse Amp
    Rating
    30A
    15A

    3
    4
    5
    6

    15A
    30A
    10A
    20A

    7
    8
    9
    10

    10A
    10A
    15A
    15A

    194

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)

    Protected circuits
    Not used (spare)
    Brake switch
    (high-mount brake lamp)
    Not used (spare)
    Not used (spare)
    Shift interlock
    Right front turn lamp/Left front
    turn lamp, Rear stop/turn lamps
    Left low beam headlamp
    Right low beam headlamp
    Interior lamps
    Instrument panel backlighting



  • Page 195

    Roadside Emergencies
    Fuse/Relay
    Location
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16

    Fuse Amp
    Rating
    10A
    7.5A
    5A
    10A
    10A
    15A

    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30
    31
    32
    33
    34
    35
    36

    20A
    20A
    25A
    15A
    15A
    15A
    15A
    20A
    10A
    10A
    20A
    5A
    5A
    5A
    10A
    10A
    10A
    5A
    10A
    5A

    37
    38

    10A
    20A

    Protected circuits
    Not used (spare)
    Power mirrors
    SYNC௡
    Not used (spare)
    Recirculated air, Air conditioning
    Global positioning system (GPS)
    module
    Power locks, Trunk release
    Heated seats
    Not used (spare)
    Data link connector
    Fog lamps, Fog lamp indicator
    Parking lamps
    High beam lamps
    Horn
    Demand lamps, Trunk lamps
    Instrument cluster
    Ignition switch
    Radio (Start)
    Instrument cluster (run/start)
    Not used (spare)
    Not used (spare)
    Restraints control module
    Not used (spare)
    Not used (spare)
    Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
    Passive anti-theft system (PATS)
    module
    Climate control (run/start)
    Subwoofer

    195

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 196

    Roadside Emergencies
    Fuse/Relay
    Location
    39

    Fuse Amp
    Rating
    20A

    40
    41

    20A
    15A

    42
    43
    44
    45
    46
    47

    10A
    10A
    10A
    5A
    7.5A
    30A (circuit
    breaker)


    48

    Protected circuits
    Radio, Center information display,
    Electronic finish panel
    Not used (spare)
    Door lock/sunroof switch
    illumination, Auto dimming rear
    view mirror, Ambient lighting
    Not used (spare)
    Heated seats relay
    Not used (spare)
    Front wipers (logic)
    Front passenger sensing system
    Sunroof, Power windows
    Delayed accessory relay

    Power distribution box
    The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
    power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
    vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
    WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
    current fuses.
    WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
    the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
    battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
    If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
    Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

    196

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 197

    Roadside Emergencies

    To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the inside of the
    passenger compartment fuse panel cover.
    The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
    Fuse/Relay
    Location
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    Fuse Amp
    Rating
    15A
    30A
    20A
    20A
    10A

    6
    7
    8
    9

    15A
    10A

    40A

    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17

    30A
    30A
    40A
    10A
    10A
    20A
    20A
    30A

    Protected circuits
    Heated mirror
    Rear defrost
    Power point
    Fuel pump
    Powertrain control module (PCM)
    keep alive power, Canister Vent
    Alt sense
    Reverse lamps
    Not used
    Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
    motor
    Wipers
    Starter
    Blower
    A/C clutch
    PCM relay coil
    Power point
    Cooling fan – low
    Cooling fan – high
    197

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 198

    Roadside Emergencies
    Fuse/Relay
    Location
    18
    19
    20
    21A
    21B
    21C
    21D
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    Fuse Amp
    Rating
    20A



    27
    28
    29
    30A
    30B
    30C
    30D
    31A
    31B
    31C
    31D
    31E
    31F
    32
    33
    34


    15A
    15A














    35

    10A




    10A



    15A

    198

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)

    Protected circuits
    ABS solenoid
    Not used
    A/C clutch relay
    Rear defrost relay
    Not used
    Blower relay
    PCM relay
    Fuel injector
    Not used
    Not used
    Not used
    PCM – emission related
    powertrain components
    Not used
    PCM
    Ignition
    Cooling fan low speed relay
    Starter relay
    Not used
    Cooling fan high speed relay
    Reverse lamp relay
    Fuel pump relay
    Wiper power relay
    Not used
    Not used
    Not used
    Not used
    EEC diode
    One-touch integrated start (OTIS)
    diode
    Run/Start



  • Page 199

    Roadside Emergencies
    CHANGING THE TIRES
    If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
    Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
    and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
    Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
    illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
    of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
    monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
    Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
    to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
    (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
    tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
    the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
    damage.
    WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
    pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and should not be used.
    However, if you must use a sealant, the TPMS sensor and valve stem
    on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
    WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
    in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
    information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
    will no longer function.
    Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
    WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
    increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
    If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
    temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
    replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
    and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
    Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
    replaced rather than repaired.

    199

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 200

    Roadside Emergencies
    A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
    is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
    and can be one of three types:
    1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
    size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
    2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
    a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
    TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
    When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
    • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
    • Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
    Safety Compliance Label
    • Tow a trailer
    • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
    tire
    • Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
    • Use commercial car washing equipment
    • Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
    Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
    location can lead to impairment of the following:
    • Handling, stability and braking performance
    • Comfort and noise
    • Ground clearance and parking at curbs
    • Winter weather driving capability
    • Wet weather driving capability
    3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
    When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
    • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
    • Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
    • Use commercial car washing equipment
    • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
    tire/wheel
    200

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 201

    Roadside Emergencies
    The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
    impairment of the following:
    • Handling, stability and braking performance
    • Comfort and noise
    • Ground clearance and parking at curbs
    • Winter weather driving capability
    • Wet weather driving capability
    • All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
    • Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
    When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
    caution should be given to:
    • Towing a trailer
    • Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
    • Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
    Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
    seek service as soon as possible.
    Stopping and securing the vehicle
    1. Park on a level surface, set the
    parking brake and activate the
    hazard flashers.
    2. Place the gearshift lever in P
    (Park) (automatic transmission) or
    R (Reverse) (manual transmission)
    and turn the engine off.

    201

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 202

    Roadside Emergencies
    Removing the spare tire and jack
    Remove the spare tire and jack by
    turning their tie-down bolts
    counterclockwise. The lug wrench is
    located in a bag next to, or on top
    of, the spare tire.

    Tire change procedure
    WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
    transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
    slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic
    transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission).
    WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
    change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
    both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
    end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
    WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
    could be seriously injured.
    WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
    vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
    avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
    wheel.
    Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
    being jacked.

    202

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 203

    Roadside Emergencies
    1. Block the diagonally opposite
    wheel.

    2. If equipped with a 6-spoke wheel
    cover that’s bolted on, remove the
    four plastic nuts by turning
    counterclockwise 1/4 turn for access
    to the lug nuts.
    Note: To avoid damage to the wheel
    cover, the 6-spoke wheel cover
    cannot be removed until the tire is
    off the vehicle.
    3. Loosen each wheel lug nut
    one-half turn counterclockwise but
    do not remove them until the wheel
    is raised off the ground.

    203

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 204

    Roadside Emergencies
    4. The vehicle jacking points are
    depicted on the yellow warning label
    on the jack shown here. Depending
    on which tire is to be changed, put
    the jack approximately 7 inches
    (18 cm) from the front wheel
    opening (1) or approximately
    17 inches (43 cm) from the rear
    wheel opening (2).
    Jack at the specified locations
    to avoid damage to the vehicle.
    WARNING: To lessen the
    risk of personal injury, do
    not put any part of your body
    under the vehicle while changing a
    tire. Do not start the engine when
    your vehicle is on the jack. The
    jack is only meant for changing
    the tire.

    5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
    6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
    facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
    hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
    7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
    8. Remove the jack and fully tighten
    1
    the lug nuts in the order shown.
    Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
    specifications later in this chapter
    for the proper lug nut torque
    3
    4
    specification.
    9. Put the flat tire, jack and lug
    wrench away. Make sure the jack is
    fastened so it does not rattle when
    2
    you drive. Unblock the wheels.

    204

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 205

    Roadside Emergencies
    WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
    Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
    after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
    removal, etc.).
    Bolt size

    Wheel lug nut torque*
    ft-lb
    N•m
    M12 x 1.5
    100
    135
    * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
    rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
    WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
    corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
    surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
    brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
    attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
    the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
    metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
    wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
    motion, resulting in loss of control.
    Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
    prior to installation. If there is
    visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
    remove loose particles by wiping
    with clean rag and apply grease.
    Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
    hole surface by smearing a “dime”
    (1 square cm) sized glob of grease
    around the wheel pilot surface (1)
    with end of finger. DO NOT apply
    grease to lugnut/stud holes or
    wheel-to-brake surfaces.

    205

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 206

    Roadside Emergencies
    JUMP STARTING
    WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
    exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
    result in injury or vehicle damage.
    WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
    eyes and clothing, if contacted.
    Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
    vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
    capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
    transmission may cause transmission damage.
    Preparing your vehicle
    When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
    automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
    transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
    considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
    transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
    transmission operation.
    1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
    2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
    damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
    3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
    making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
    both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
    parts.
    4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
    you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
    5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
    surges. Turn all other accessories off.

    206

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 207

    Roadside Emergencies





    Connecting the jumper cables
    Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
    the assisting (boosting) battery.
    1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
    cable to the positive (+) terminal of
    the discharged battery.
    1
    2. Connect the other end of the
    4
    positive (+) cable to the positive
    (+) terminal of the assisting battery.
    +
    3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
    the negative (-) terminal of the
    assisting battery.
    4. Make the final connection of the
    negative (-) cable to an exposed
    metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
    3
    engine, away from the battery and
    the carburetor/fuel injection system.
    2
    +

    Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
    covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
    WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
    negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
    cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
    Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
    engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
    Jump starting
    1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
    moderately increased speed.
    2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
    3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
    additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
    207

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 208

    Roadside Emergencies
    Removing the jumper cables
    Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
    connected.





    Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
    the assisting (boosting) battery.
    1. Remove the jumper cable from
    the ground metal surface.
    2. Remove the jumper cable on the
    4
    D
    1
    D
    A
    negative (-) terminal of the booster
    vehicle’s battery.
    +
    3. Remove the jumper cable from
    the positive (+) terminal of the
    booster vehicle’s battery.
    4. Remove the jumper cable from
    the positive (+) terminal of the
    disabled vehicle’s battery.
    2
    B
    +

    3
    C

    After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
    removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
    relearn its idle conditions.

    208

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 209

    Roadside Emergencies
    WRECKER TOWING

    If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
    service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
    roadside assistance service provider.
    It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
    equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
    approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
    If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment,
    the front wheels (drive wheels) must be placed on a dolly to prevent
    damage to the transmission.
    If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
    damage may occur.
    Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
    truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
    proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.

    209

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 210

    Roadside Emergencies
    Emergency towing
    In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
    to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
    vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
    towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
    • Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
    direction.
    • Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
    in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
    gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
    • Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
    • Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).

    210

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 211

    Customer Assistance
    GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
    Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
    Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
    your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
    return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
    continued satisfaction.
    Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
    equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
    warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
    needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
    A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
    vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
    Motorcraft௡ parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized
    by Ford.
    Away from home
    If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
    Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
    below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
    In the United States:
    Mailing address
    Ford Motor Company
    Customer Relationship Center
    P.O. Box 6248
    Dearborn, MI 48121
    Telephone
    1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
    (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
    Online
    Additional information and resources are available online at
    www.genuineservice.com.
    • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
    • Owner Guides
    • Maintenance Schedules
    • Recalls
    • Ford Extended Service Plans
    • Ford Genuine Accessories
    • Service specials and promotions.
    211

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 212

    Customer Assistance
    In Canada:
    Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
    Customer Relationship Centre
    Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
    P.O. Box 2000
    Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
    Telephone
    1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
    Online
    www.ford.ca
    Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
    Lincoln Centre
    Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
    P.O. Box 2000
    Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
    Telephone
    1-800-387-9333
    Online
    www.lincolncanada.com
    Additional assistance
    If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
    are receiving, follow these steps:
    1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
    selling/servicing authorized dealer.
    2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
    Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
    3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
    policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
    In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
    information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
    • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
    • Your telephone number (home and business)
    • The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
    • The vehicle’s current odometer reading
    In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
    remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
    repair attempt in some states.
    212

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 213

    Customer Assistance
    In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
    AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
    Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
    or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
    handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
    or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
    Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
    IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
    California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
    or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
    vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
    attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
    vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
    reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
    payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
    use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
    or replacement vehicle.
    California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
    has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
    applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
    of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
    first:
    1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
    likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
    2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
    defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
    the vehicle) OR
    3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
    more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
    In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
    manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
    following address:
    Ford Motor Company
    16800 Executive Plaza Drive
    Mail Drop 3NE-B
    Dearborn, MI 48126

    213

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 214

    Customer Assistance
    You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
    before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
    Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
    LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
    Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
    to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
    Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
    resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
    THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
    (U.S. ONLY)
    Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
    If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
    procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
    you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
    The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
    arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
    both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
    the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
    want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
    participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
    scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
    before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
    provided and make a decision after the hearing.
    Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
    within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not
    bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court
    where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are
    admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB
    AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must
    comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
    letter.
    BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
    please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
    for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
    information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
    already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
    mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
    along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
    claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
    214

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 215

    Customer Assistance
    You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
    1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
    BBB AUTO LINE
    4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
    Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
    BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
    Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
    Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
    limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
    without notice and without obligation.
    UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
    (CANADA ONLY)
    For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
    where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
    authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
    have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
    third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
    Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
    The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
    alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
    settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
    designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
    proceedings.
    In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
    hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
    environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
    parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
    disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
    award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
    CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
    For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
    Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
    www.camvap.ca.

    215

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 216

    Customer Assistance
    GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
    Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
    appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
    of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
    If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
    index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
    office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
    The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
    damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
    engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
    Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
    fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
    back into the U.S.
    If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
    Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
    America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized
    dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
    FORD MOTOR COMPANY
    FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
    1555 Fairlane Drive
    Fairlane Business Park #3
    Allen Park, Michigan 48101
    U.S.A.
    Telephone: (313) 594-4857
    FAX: (313) 390-0804
    Email: expcac@ford.com
    If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
    Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
    dealer cannot help you, contact:
    Ford International Business Development Inc.
    Customer Assistance Center
    P.O. Box 11957
    Caparra Heights Station
    San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
    Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
    FAX: (313) 390-0804
    Email: prcac@ford.com

    216

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 217

    Customer Assistance
    If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
    Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
    dealer cannot help you, contact:
    Ford Middle East
    Customer Relationship Center
    P.O. Box 21470
    Dubai, United Arab Emirates
    Telephone: +971 4 3326084
    FAX: +971 4 3327299
    Email: menacac@ford.com
    www.me.ford.com
    If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
    above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
    new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
    If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
    dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
    direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
    Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
    ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
    To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
    HELM, INCORPORATED
    P.O. Box 07150
    Detroit, Michigan 48207
    Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
    Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
    Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
    www.helminc.com.
    (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
    money order.)
    Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
    French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
    by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
    previously in this section.
    217

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 218

    Customer Assistance
    REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
    If you believe that your vehicle has
    a defect which could cause a crash
    or could cause injury or death, you
    should immediately inform the
    National Highway Traffic Safety
    Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
    If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
    if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
    recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
    in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
    Company.
    To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
    1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
    or write to:
    Administrator
    1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
    Washington, D.C. 20590
    You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
    http://www.safercar.gov.
    REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
    could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
    Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
    https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

    218

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 219

    Cleaning
    WASHING THE EXTERIOR
    Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
    pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
    available from your authorized dealer.
    • Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
    or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
    surfaces.
    • Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
    strong, direct sunlight.
    • Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
    best results.
    • Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
    eliminate water spotting.
    • It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
    winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
    damage to the vehicle.
    • Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
    and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
    paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft௡ Bug and Tar Remover
    (ZC-42) which is available from your authorized dealer.
    • Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
    car wash.
    • Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
    surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
    wash off as soon as possible.
    Exterior chrome
    • Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
    shampoo, such as Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
    • Use Motorcraft௡ Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
    your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
    clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
    few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
    • Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
    as they can scratch the chrome surface.
    WAXING
    • Wash the vehicle first.
    • Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
    219

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 220

    Cleaning
    • Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
    (low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
    racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
    area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
    PAINT CHIPS
    Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
    Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
    your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
    • Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
    spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
    • Always read the instructions before using the products.
    ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
    Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
    finish. In order to maintain their shine:
    • Clean weekly with Motorcraft௡ Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
    which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
    dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
    thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
    • Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
    covers.
    • Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
    wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
    cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
    brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
    • Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
    cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
    • To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft௡ Bug and Tar Remover
    (ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
    ENGINE
    Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
    buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
    When washing:
    • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
    high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
    damage.
    220

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 221

    Cleaning
    • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
    engine block or other engine components.
    • Spray Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all
    parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use
    Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
    • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
    running engine may cause internal damage.
    • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
    well, or the area in and around these locations.
    • Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
    the engine.

    PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
    Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
    available from your authorized dealer.
    • For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
    • If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft௡ Bug and Tar
    Remover (ZC-42).
    WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
    The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
    cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
    vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
    hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
    coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
    221

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 222

    Cleaning
    may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
    smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
    • The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
    a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft௡ Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
    Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
    • The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
    Motorcraft௡ Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A) in
    the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid [CXC-37-(A, B,
    D, or F)] in Canada, available from your authorized dealer. This
    washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which
    helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and
    windshield from automated car wash facilities. Be sure to replace
    wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
    • Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
    • Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
    If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
    or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
    surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
    cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
    cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
    windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
    with water.
    Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
    inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
    damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
    INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
    Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
    clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
    cloth to dry these areas.
    • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
    of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
    driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
    • Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
    contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
    lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
    surfaces.
    • Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
    finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
    222

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 223

    Cleaning
    • Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
    surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
    covered by your warranty.
    WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
    when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
    contamination of the airbag system.
    If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
    panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
    1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
    2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
    thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
    be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
    commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
    interiors.
    3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
    to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
    area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
    4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
    clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
    5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
    INTERIOR
    For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
    airbags:
    • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
    • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft௡ Professional Strength
    Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
    • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
    with Motorcraft௡ Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
    Motorcraft௡ Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
    • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
    immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
    • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
    stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
    the seat materials.
    223

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 224

    Cleaning
    WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
    vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
    webbing.
    WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
    not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
    could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of
    the side airbag in a collision.
    LEATHER SEATS
    (IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCHா EDITION)
    For King Ranch௡ leather seats, refer to a separate section in this
    chapter.
    • Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
    • For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
    more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
    solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft௡ Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
    area with a soft cloth.
    • If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
    water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
    available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
    • To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
    an inconspicuous part of the leather.
    • Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
    cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
    leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
    damage to the leather.
    LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCHா EDITION ONLY
    (IF EQUIPPED)
    Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
    leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
    maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
    Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
    leather.

    224

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 225

    Cleaning
    Cleaning
    For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
    brush.
    For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
    thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution.
    • Clean spills as quickly as possible.
    • Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
    leather as cleaners may darken the leather.
    • Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
    products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
    • Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
    cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
    Scratches
    Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
    steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
    as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
    should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
    In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
    marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
    instructions as in the Conditioning section.
    Conditioning
    Bottles of King Ranch௡ Leather Conditioner are available at the King
    Ranch௡ Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
    telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
    unable to obtain King Ranch௡ Leather Conditioner, use another premium
    leather conditioner.
    • Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
    • Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
    conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
    • Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
    conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
    film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
    UNDERBODY
    Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
    door drain holes free from packed dirt.
    225

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 226

    Cleaning
    FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
    Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
    products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
    quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
    automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
    and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
    materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
    the following products or products of equivalent quality:
    Motorcraft௡ Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
    Motorcraft௡ Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
    Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
    Motorcraft௡ Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
    Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
    Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
    Motorcraft௡ Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
    Motorcraft௡ Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
    Motorcraft௡ Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
    [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
    Motorcraft௡ Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
    (ZC-32-A)
    Motorcraft௡ Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
    Motorcraft௡ Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
    Motorcraft௡ Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
    Motorcraft௡ Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
    Motorcraft௡ Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)

    226

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 227

    Maintenance and Specifications
    SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
    To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
    information which makes tracking routine service easy.
    If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
    provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
    find out which parts and services are covered.
    Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
    conforming to specifications. Motorcraft௡ parts are designed and built to
    provide the best performance in your vehicle.
    PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
    Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.
    • Do not work on a hot engine.
    • When the engine is running, make sure that loose clothing, jewelry or
    long hair does not get caught in moving parts.
    • Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
    space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
    • Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
    from the battery and all fuel related parts.
    If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle condition
    before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in Battery in this
    section.
    Working with the engine off
    1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking
    brake and shift to P (Park). For vehicles equipped with a manual
    transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal,
    place the gearshift in 1 (First), and release the clutch pedal.
    2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
    3. Block the wheels.
    Working with the engine on
    1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking
    brake and shift to P (Park). For vehicles equipped with a manual
    transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal,
    place the gearshift in N (Neutral), and release the clutch pedal.
    2. Block the wheels.
    227

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 228

    Maintenance and Specifications
    WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
    personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
    cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
    OPENING THE HOOD
    1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
    release handle located under the
    instrument panel.

    2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
    locate the auxiliary latch centered
    under the front of the hood and
    then release it by pushing the
    auxiliary latch to the left.

    3. Lift the hood and locate the prop
    rod on the passenger side of the
    vehicle near the fender. Support the
    hood with the prop rod.

    228

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 229

    Maintenance and Specifications
    IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

    1. Engine oil filler cap
    2. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
    3. Power distribution box
    4. Battery
    5. Air filter
    6. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick (if equipped)
    7. Engine oil dipstick
    8. Power steering fluid reservoir
    9. Engine coolant reservoir
    10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

    229

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 230

    Maintenance and Specifications
    WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
    Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
    level is low. In very cold weather, do
    not fill the reservoir completely.
    Only use a washer fluid that meets
    Ford specifications. Do not use any
    special washer fluid such as
    windshield water repellent type fluid
    or bug wash. They may cause
    squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing. Refer to Maintenance
    product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
    State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
    use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
    Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
    only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
    vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
    WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
    40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
    to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
    result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
    accident.
    CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
    1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
    away from the glass. Turn the blade
    at a right angle to the arm. Press
    the lock tab (A) to release the blade
    from the arm loop and pull the
    blade down toward the windshield
    to remove it from the arm.
    2. Attach the new blade to the arm
    loop and pull it into place until a
    click is heard.
    Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
    Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
    windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
    chapter.
    230

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 231

    Maintenance and Specifications
    To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
    scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
    layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
    wiper rubber element.
    ENGINE OIL
    Checking the engine oil
    Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
    intervals for checking the engine oil.
    1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
    2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
    oil pan.
    3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
    (automatic transmission) or 1st (manual transmission).
    4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
    5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
    6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
    • If the oil level is between the
    MIN and MAX marks, the oil
    level is acceptable. DO NOT
    ADD OIL.
    • If the oil level is below the MIN
    mark, add enough engine oil to
    raise the level within the MIN and
    MAX range. Refer to Adding
    engine oil in this chapter.
    • Oil levels above MAX mark
    may cause engine damage. If
    the engine is overfilled, some oil
    must be removed from the engine
    by an authorized dealer.
    7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
    Adding engine oil
    1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
    oil in this chapter.
    231

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 232

    Maintenance and Specifications
    2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
    engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
    and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
    3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
    MAX mark on the engine oil level dipstick.
    4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
    5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
    tightly until clicks are heard, or until it is snug.
    To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
    engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
    Engine oil and filter recommendations
    Look for this certification
    trademark.

    Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
    Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum
    Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the
    current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
    economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
    Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
    automobile manufacturers.
    To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft௡ SAE
    5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
    WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
    durability performance meeting all requirements for your
    vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
    capacities later in this chapter for more information.
    Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
    treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
    is not covered by Ford warranty.
    232

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 233

    Maintenance and Specifications
    Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
    listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
    Ford production and Motorcraft௡ replacement oil filters are designed for
    added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
    that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
    engine noises or knock may be experienced.
    It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft௡ oil filter or
    another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
    BATTERY
    Your vehicle is equipped with a
    Motorcraft௡ maintenance-free
    battery which normally does not
    require additional water during its
    life of service.

    If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
    after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
    For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
    dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
    the battery terminals.
    If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
    from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
    acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
    It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
    disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
    extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
    during storage.
    Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
    vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
    performance and durability.
    WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
    can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
    or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
    battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
    proper ventilation.
    233

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 234

    Maintenance and Specifications
    WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
    pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
    vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
    battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
    opposite corners.
    WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
    contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
    Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
    possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
    eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
    get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
    immediately.
    WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
    contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
    Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
    some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
    the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
    relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
    performance. To begin this process:
    1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
    2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
    position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
    engine.
    3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
    4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
    5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
    6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
    • The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
    relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
    • If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
    quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
    trim is eventually relearned.
    When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
    automatic transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of
    234

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 235

    Maintenance and Specifications
    this, the transmission may shift firmly when first driven. This operation is
    considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its
    optimum shift feel.

    TU

    LE
    AD

    RE

    If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
    the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
    reconnected.
    • Always dispose of automotive
    batteries in a responsible manner.
    Follow your local authorized
    standards for disposal. Call your
    local authorized recycling center
    to find out more about recycling
    automotive batteries.
    RN

    RECYCLE

    ENGINE COOLANT
    Checking engine coolant
    The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
    intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
    concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
    which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
    testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
    coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
    COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
    coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
    Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
    concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
    60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
    50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
    • Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
    • Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
    • Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
    • Proper function of calibrated gauges.

    235

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 236

    Maintenance and Specifications
    When the engine is cold, check the
    level of the engine coolant in the
    reservoir.

    • The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level, or within the
    COLD FILL or MIN / MAX range as listed on the engine coolant
    reservoir (depending upon application).
    • Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
    schedules.
    If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
    the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
    low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
    engine coolant in this chapter.
    Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
    coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
    function and vehicle location.
    Adding engine coolant
    When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
    and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
    engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. If coolant is
    filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is
    not cool, the system will remain underfilled.
    WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
    Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
    can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
    engine parts.
    WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
    fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
    could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
    • DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle.
    Make sure the correct coolant is used. DO NOT MIX recycled coolant
    236

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 237

    Maintenance and Specifications
    and new (unused) coolant together in the vehicle. Mixing of engine
    coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. The use of an
    improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components
    and may void the warranty. Refer to Maintenance product
    specifications and capacities in this chapter.
    • A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
    of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
    cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
    engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
    (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
    overheating or freezing.
    • Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
    mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
    and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
    freezing.
    • Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
    can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
    coolant.
    For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
    on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
    reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
    distilled water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have
    a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
    remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
    an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
    WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
    engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
    The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
    out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
    Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
    following these steps:
    1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
    2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
    pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
    Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
    3. Step back while the pressure releases.
    4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
    cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
    237

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 238

    Maintenance and Specifications
    5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
    within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
    If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
    until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
    6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
    installed to prevent coolant loss.
    After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
    to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
    (protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
    concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
    coolant concentration.
    Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
    reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
    necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
    distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
    If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
    month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
    Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
    level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
    damage.
    Recycled engine coolant
    Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
    coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
    Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
    manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
    and disposing of automotive fluids.
    Coolant refill capacity
    To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
    to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
    Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
    in this section.
    Severe climates
    If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
    • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
    above 50%.
    • NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
    238

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 239

    Maintenance and Specifications
    • A coolant concentration of 60% will provide freeze point
    protection down to -62°F [-52°C]. Increased engine coolant
    concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat
    protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause
    engine damage.
    • If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
    ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
    adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you
    drive in the winter months.
    If you drive in extremely hot climates:
    • It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
    above 40%.
    • NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
    • A coolant concentration of 40% will provide freeze point
    protection down to -12°F [-24°C]. Decreased engine coolant
    concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion/freeze
    protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause
    engine damage.
    • If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
    ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
    adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
    Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
    mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
    and engine protection.
    What you should know about fail-safe cooling
    If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
    be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
    The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
    and terrain.
    How fail-safe cooling works
    If the engine begins to overheat:
    • The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
    area.
    • The

    (engine coolant temperature) indicator light will illuminate.

    If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
    will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
    cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
    239

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 240

    Maintenance and Specifications
    When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
    • The engine power will be limited.
    • The air conditioning system will be disabled.
    Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
    • The engine will completely shut down.
    • Steering and braking effort will increase.
    Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
    your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
    engine damage.
    When fail-safe mode is activated
    You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
    vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
    operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
    capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
    damage, therefore:
    1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
    2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
    3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
    4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
    WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
    Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
    bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
    When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
    able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
    without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
    and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
    resulting in serious injury.
    WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
    engine is running or hot.
    5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
    Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
    increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
    authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    FUEL FILTER
    Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
    the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
    240

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 241

    Maintenance and Specifications
    WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
    Important safety precautions
    WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
    overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
    WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
    filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
    until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
    fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
    WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
    excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
    or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
    serious personal injury.
    WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
    if misused or mishandled.
    WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
    cancer-causing agent.
    Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
    • Extinguish all smoking materials
    and any open flames before
    refueling your vehicle.
    • Always turn off the vehicle before
    refueling.
    • Automotive fuels can be harmful
    or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
    swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
    call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
    apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
    • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
    can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
    excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
    illness and permanent injury.
    241

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 242

    Maintenance and Specifications
    • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
    remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
    seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
    lead to permanent injury.
    • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
    splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
    clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
    prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
    • Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
    disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
    or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
    individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
    splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
    water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
    reaction.
    WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
    never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
    smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
    conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
    WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
    produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
    pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
    Refueling









    WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
    severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
    Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
    Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
    Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
    Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
    Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
    when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
    Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
    fuel.
    Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.

    242

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 243

    Maintenance and Specifications
    Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
    filling an ungrounded fuel container:
    • Place approved fuel container on the ground.
    • DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
    cargo area).
    • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
    filling.
    • DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
    position.
    Fuel filler cap
    When fueling your vehicle:
    1. Turn the engine off.
    2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
    3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
    4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
    filler pipe.
    5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until at least one click is
    heard.
    or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
    If the check fuel cap light
    the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
    come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
    At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
    cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
    or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
    light
    or “check fuel
    take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light
    cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
    (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
    highway driving.
    or “check fuel cap”
    Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light
    light to turn on as well.
    message on may cause the
    If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
    cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
    be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
    correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap
    is not used.
    243

    2011 Focus (foc)
    Owners Guide, 1st Printing
    USA (fus)



  • Page 244

    Maintenance and Specifications
    WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
    filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
    until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
    fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
    WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
    excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
    or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
    personal injury.

    Choosing the right fuel
    Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
    of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
    fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
    could damage your vehicle.
    Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
    compounds, including manganese-based additives.
    Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
    powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
    be covered under warran